PDS2000 User Manual.pdf

User Manual
PDS2000
Version 4.2.4
March 2013
RESON B.V.
Stuttgartstraat 42- 44
3047 AS Rotterdam
The Netherlands
Tel.: +31 (0)10 245 15 00

www.reson.nl
Amendment Record Sheet
Rev. Date Reason for Modifications
4.2.4 14/03/2013 The manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.7.0.64
4.2.2 03/12/2012 Pipe Detection added to PDS2000 Documentation
4.2.0 30/08/2012 The manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.7.0.45; sonar targets are
updated to version 3.7.0.46.
4.0.2 28/10/2011 Tresco Charts added and some small modifications are added.
3.7.6 18/09/2010 Small modifications are added.
3.7.4 15/06/2010 New RESON logo and small updates are added.
3.7.2 04/02/2010 The complete manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.5.0.1
3.7.1 12/01/2010 Small updates
3.4.1 21/12/2007 The manual is updated for PDS2000 version 3.2.0.4. Parts of the manual
are already updated for the new version 3.3.0.0.
Contents
1 Introduction 1
1.1 PDS2000 ................................................................................................................ 1
2 PDS2000 Documentation 3
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3
2.2.1 Anchor Handling ........................................................................................... 3
2.2.2 Bar Sweep..................................................................................................... 3
2.2.3 Boeilog .......................................................................................................... 4
2.2.3.1 Appendix Boeilog................................................................................. 4
2.2.4 Boraciet ......................................................................................................... 4
2.2.4.1 Addendum Boraciet ............................................................................. 4
2.2.5 Bottom Classification .................................................................................... 4
2.2.6 Bucket Dredging ........................................................................................... 5
2.2.7 Cable Lay ...................................................................................................... 5
2.2.8 Cutter Dredge ............................................................................................... 5
2.2.9 ES3 ............................................................................................................... 5
2.2.10 Excavator .................................................................................................... 5
2.2.11 Frequently Asked Questions ....................................................................... 6
2.2.12 HydroBat ..................................................................................................... 6
2.2.13 Interface Setup ............................................................................................ 6
2.2.14 Multibeam.................................................................................................... 6
2.2.15 Multibeam Calibration ................................................................................. 6
2.2.16 PDS2000 LiteView ...................................................................................... 7
2.2.17 PDS2000 User Manual ............................................................................... 7
2.2.18 Pipe Detection ............................................................................................. 7
2.2.19 Pipe Position Monitor .................................................................................. 7
2.2.20 Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay ........................................................................ 8
2.2.21 Rope Excavator .......................................................................................... 8
2.2.22 Slope Protection .......................................................................................... 8
2.2.23 Sonar Swath ............................................................................................... 8
2.2.24 Tide Application .......................................................................................... 9
2.2.25 Trailing Suction Hopper .............................................................................. 9
2.2.26 Trencher ...................................................................................................... 9
2.2.27 USBL ........................................................................................................... 9
3 Installation 11
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 11
3.1.1 Requirements .............................................................................................. 11
3.1.2 Memory Improvement ................................................................................. 12
3.2 Install PDS2000 .................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Start PDS2000 Installation .......................................................................... 12
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  i

3.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS2000 ...................................................................... 15
3.2.3 File Structure .............................................................................................. 15
3.3 Adapting Hardware .............................................................................................. 17
3.3.1 Network Card .............................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Serial Extender Cards ................................................................................ 17
3.3.2.1 USB to serial converters ................................................................... 17
3.3.2.2 Other cards ....................................................................................... 18
3.3.3 Monitors ...................................................................................................... 19
3.4 PDS2000 Dongle ................................................................................................. 19
3.4.1 Update of PDS2000 Dongle ....................................................................... 20
3.5 Installing a Remote Presentation ......................................................................... 22
3.5.1 Running a Remote Presentation ................................................................ 24
3.6 Installing and Using C-Map .................................................................................. 24
3.6.1 Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map ................................................... 24
3.6.2 Applying for a C-Map License .................................................................... 29
3.6.3 Updating C-Map Database ......................................................................... 34
3.6.4 Using the C-Map Layer in PDS2000 .......................................................... 36
3.7 Installing and Using Tresco .................................................................................. 38
3.7.1 Install Tresco Charts and Dongle Driver .................................................... 38
3.7.2 Run SetupTrescoKernel.exe ...................................................................... 41
3.7.3 Using the Tresco Layer in PDS2000 .......................................................... 44
4 Using PDS2000 47
4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 47
4.2 Docking ................................................................................................................ 48
4.2.1 Dock Areas ................................................................................................. 49
4.3 Context Menus ..................................................................................................... 49
4.4 Navigation in a 3D View ....................................................................................... 50
4.4.1 Rotate the Data .......................................................................................... 50
4.4.2 Shift the Data .............................................................................................. 51
4.4.3 Zoom in/out in the Data .............................................................................. 51
4.4.4 Scale the Data ............................................................................................ 51
4.4.5 Center the Data .......................................................................................... 51
5 Starting PDS2000 53
5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 53
5.1.1 Project......................................................................................................... 53
5.1.2 Application Type ......................................................................................... 53
5.1.3 Configuration .............................................................................................. 53
5.2 Project Structure .................................................................................................. 54
5.3 Projects Common Files ........................................................................................ 54
5.4 New Project Wizard .............................................................................................. 55
5.4.1 Project Configuration .................................................................................. 57
5.4.1.1 Description ........................................................................................ 57
5.4.1.2 Units .................................................................................................. 58
5.4.1.3 Coordinate System ........................................................................... 58
5.4.1.4 Formats ............................................................................................. 59
5.4.1.5 Log Files ............................................................................................ 59
5.4.1.6 File History ........................................................................................ 61
5.4.1.7 Disk Space ........................................................................................ 61
ii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

5.4.1.8 Alert Sounds ...................................................................................... 62
5.4.1.9 Options .............................................................................................. 62
5.4.1.10 GPS Time Parameters .................................................................... 63
5.4.1.11 Sonar Target Parameters ................................................................ 63
5.4.1.12 Icon Images ..................................................................................... 64
5.4.2 Selecting the Application Type ................................................................... 64
5.4.3 Run the Configuration Wizard ..................................................................... 65
5.4.4 Vessel Selection ......................................................................................... 66
5.4.5 Layout ......................................................................................................... 67
5.4.6 Events ......................................................................................................... 68
5.4.7 Alarms ......................................................................................................... 69
5.4.8 Closing the Wizard ...................................................................................... 70
5.5 Create Project from Log Data ............................................................................... 70
6 Coordinate System 71
6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 71
6.2 Project Coordinate System ................................................................................... 72
6.3 Coordinate System Wizard ................................................................................... 73
6.3.1 New Coordinate System ............................................................................. 73
6.3.2 Select Coordinate System .......................................................................... 74
6.3.3 Ellipsoids ..................................................................................................... 75
6.3.4 Datum Transformation ................................................................................ 76
6.3.5 Select Datum Transformation ..................................................................... 77
6.3.6 Datum Transformation Parameters ............................................................ 78
6.3.7 Geoid Model ................................................................................................ 79
6.3.8 Unit .............................................................................................................. 81
6.3.9 Projection .................................................................................................... 82
6.3.10 Select Projection ....................................................................................... 83
6.3.11 Projection Parameters .............................................................................. 84
6.3.12 Post Correction ......................................................................................... 85
6.3.13 Save Coordinate System .......................................................................... 86
6.3.14 Coordinate System Overview ................................................................... 87
6.4 Edit Coordinate System ........................................................................................ 87
7 Vessel Configuration 91
7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 91
7.2 Setup a Vessel Configuration ............................................................................... 91
7.2.1 New Vessel Configuration........................................................................... 92
7.3 Geometry .............................................................................................................. 93
7.3.1 Vessel Contour ........................................................................................... 95
7.3.1.1 Import Vessel Contours ..................................................................... 96
7.4 Equipment............................................................................................................. 96
7.4.1 Sub System ................................................................................................. 98
7.4.2 Navisound Graphical Trace ........................................................................ 99
7.4.3 Outputs...................................................................................................... 100
7.5 Computations ..................................................................................................... 101
7.5.1 Advanced Computations ........................................................................... 101
7.6 Data Sources ...................................................................................................... 103
7.7 Guidance ............................................................................................................ 104
7.8 Tools ................................................................................................................... 105
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  iii

7.8.1 Anchor Definition ...................................................................................... 106
7.8.2 Crane Configuration ................................................................................. 107
7.8.3 Cutter ........................................................................................................ 109
7.8.4 Dredge Logging Settings .......................................................................... 110
7.8.5 Interval Logging ........................................................................................ 111
7.8.6 Magnometer Dialog .................................................................................. 113
7.8.7 Pipe Configuration .................................................................................... 114
7.8.8 Production Parameters ............................................................................. 115
7.8.9 Trip Registration ....................................................................................... 116
7.9 Logging .............................................................................................................. 117
7.9.1 File Formats .............................................................................................. 117
7.9.1.1 PDS2000 Format ............................................................................ 118
7.9.1.2 PDS2000 Grid Model ...................................................................... 119
7.9.1.3 Winfrog Format ............................................................................... 119
7.9.1.4 Simrad EM3000 Format .................................................................. 119
7.9.1.5 Cleaned XYZ Data .......................................................................... 119
7.9.1.6 Production Format .......................................................................... 120
7.9.1.7 Dredge Track Format ...................................................................... 120
7.9.1.8 DXF Format..................................................................................... 120
7.9.1.9 XTF Format ..................................................................................... 120
7.9.1.10 Backscatter Grid Model ................................................................. 121
7.9.1.11 S7K Format ................................................................................... 122
7.9.1.12 SDS Format .................................................................................. 123
7.9.1.13 Interval Logging Format ................................................................ 123
7.9.1.14 FAU Format................................................................................... 123
7.9.1.15 GSF Format .................................................................................. 124
7.9.2 Log Space Management .......................................................................... 125
7.9.3 Condition Check ....................................................................................... 126
7.9.4 Create New Log File ................................................................................. 126
7.10 Simulation ........................................................................................................ 127
7.11 Aliases .............................................................................................................. 128
7.12 Alarms .............................................................................................................. 129
7.12.1 Vessel Alarms ......................................................................................... 129
7.12.2 Device Alarms ........................................................................................ 130
8 Guidance 131
8.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 131
8.2 Route .................................................................................................................. 132
8.2.1 Route Editor .............................................................................................. 133
8.2.2 ASCII Import Wizard ................................................................................. 136
8.3 Runlines ............................................................................................................. 138
8.3.1 Runlines Editor ......................................................................................... 139
8.4 Waypoints .......................................................................................................... 141
8.4.1 Waypoints Editor ...................................................................................... 142
8.5 Design Model ..................................................................................................... 143
8.5.1 3D Design Model Editor............................................................................ 144
8.6 Cutter Dredge ..................................................................................................... 146
8.7 Work Areas ........................................................................................................ 147
8.8 Restricted Areas ................................................................................................. 148
8.8.1 Restricted Areas Editor............................................................................. 148
iv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

8.9 Vessel Placement ............................................................................................... 149
8.9.1 Placement Points Editor............................................................................ 150
8.10 Dredge Instruction ............................................................................................ 151
8.10.1 Dredge Instruction Editor ........................................................................ 151
8.11 Object Distance ................................................................................................ 152
9 Events 155
9.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 155
9.2 Events Mode ....................................................................................................... 155
9.2.1 Mode ......................................................................................................... 156
9.2.2 Conditions ................................................................................................. 156
9.2.3 Push Button .............................................................................................. 156
9.2.4 Event Definition ......................................................................................... 156
9.2.4.1 Separator Delimited ......................................................................... 158
9.2.4.2 Fixed Field ....................................................................................... 158
9.2.4.3 Field Selection ................................................................................. 159
9.3 Events Data Source ............................................................................................ 160
9.4 Events Numbering .............................................................................................. 161
10 Control Center 163

10.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 163
10.2 Help Menu ........................................................................................................ 164
10.3 Display Mode .................................................................................................... 165
10.4 Clock Synchronization ...................................................................................... 165
10.4.1 Clock Synchronization Settings .............................................................. 166
10.4.2 Activate Clock Synchronization .............................................................. 167
10.4.3 PDS2000 SetTime Service ..................................................................... 167
10.5 Interfacing ......................................................................................................... 168
10.5.1 Interfacing Page ...................................................................................... 168
10.5.1.1 XSE ............................................................................................... 169
10.5.1.2 Socket ............................................................................................ 169
10.5.1.3 Serial ............................................................................................. 170
10.5.1.4 RTA ............................................................................................... 171
10.5.1.5 RGL ............................................................................................... 171
10.5.1.6 R7KI ............................................................................................... 171
10.5.1.7 R7K ................................................................................................ 172
10.5.1.8 OPC ............................................................................................... 172
10.5.1.9 NCC ............................................................................................... 173
10.5.1.10 Edgetech ..................................................................................... 173
10.6 Import................................................................................................................ 173
10.6.1 Single Beam XYZ Import ........................................................................ 175
10.6.1.1 ASCII File Options ......................................................................... 176
10.6.1.2 Runline Options ............................................................................. 176
10.6.1.3 File Selection ................................................................................. 177
10.6.1.4 ASCII Parsing Wizards .................................................................. 179
10.6.1.5 Parsing XYZ Data .......................................................................... 180
10.6.1.6 Parsing Date And Time ................................................................. 182
10.6.1.7 Parsing Runline Data .................................................................... 183
10.6.2 XTF Import .............................................................................................. 183
10.6.3 S7K Import .............................................................................................. 184
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  v

10.6.3.1 Offsets ........................................................................................... 184
10.6.4 SZ Import ................................................................................................ 186
10.6.5 Simrad EM3000 Import........................................................................... 187
10.6.6 Save Import Configuration ...................................................................... 187
10.6.7 PDS2000 Log Data File .......................................................................... 188
10.7 Batch Plot ......................................................................................................... 188
10.7.1 Batch Plot Dialog .................................................................................... 188
10.8 Quick Profile Plot .............................................................................................. 190
10.8.1 Quick Profile Plot Setup.......................................................................... 191
10.8.1.1 Filesets .......................................................................................... 191
10.8.1.2 DTM .............................................................................................. 192
10.8.1.3 Design ........................................................................................... 192
10.8.1.4 Text ............................................................................................... 193
10.8.2 Quick Profile Plot Options....................................................................... 193
10.9 Geo Calculator ................................................................................................. 194
10.9.1 Manual Coordinate Conversion .............................................................. 194
10.9.1.1 Convergence ................................................................................. 196
10.9.1.2 Point Scale Factor ......................................................................... 196
10.9.2 Advance Manual Conversion ................................................................. 197
10.9.3 Compute 3 Shift Parameters .................................................................. 198
10.9.4 File Coordinate Conversion .................................................................... 199
10.10 User Accounts ................................................................................................ 200
10.10.1 Manage User Levels............................................................................. 201
10.10.2 New User Account ................................................................................ 203
10.10.3 Changing User Account........................................................................ 203
10.11 Language ....................................................................................................... 203
10.12 Power Management ....................................................................................... 204
10.12.1 Power Management Check .................................................................. 205
10.13 General Settings ............................................................................................ 206
11 Explorer 209
11.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 209
11.2 Context Menus ................................................................................................. 210
11.2.1 General Context Menu ........................................................................... 211
11.2.1.1 Backup Files Outside Project ........................................................ 211
11.2.2 File Group Context Menu ....................................................................... 213
11.2.3 File Context Menu .................................................................................. 213
11.3 Projects Common Database ............................................................................ 214
11.4 PDS2000 Database ......................................................................................... 215
11.4.1 Convert S-57 to C-Map........................................................................... 217
11.4.1.1 Updates ......................................................................................... 219
11.5 Project Database .............................................................................................. 219
11.5.1 Clipping Polygons ................................................................................... 224
11.5.1.1 Clipping Polygon Editor ................................................................. 225
11.5.2 Color Tables ........................................................................................... 226
11.5.2.1 Color Table Generator .................................................................. 226
11.5.2.2 Color Table for Bottom Classification ........................................... 230
11.5.2.3 Dredge Differential Color Table .................................................... 231
11.5.3 Contour Definitions ................................................................................. 231
11.5.3.1 Contour Definition Generator ........................................................ 232
vi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

11.5.4 Design Profile Templates ........................................................................ 233
11.5.4.1 Design Profile Template Editor ...................................................... 233
11.5.5 Excluded Areas ....................................................................................... 234
11.5.5.1 Excluded Areas Editor ................................................................... 234
11.5.6 Profile Design Models ............................................................................. 234
11.5.6.1 Profile Design Model Editor with Runlines .................................... 235
11.5.6.2 Profile Design Model Editor with a Route ...................................... 236
11.5.7 Sound Velocity Profiles ........................................................................... 237
11.5.7.1 Sound Velocity Profile Editor ......................................................... 238
11.5.7.2 Import an ASCII Sound Velocity File ............................................. 238
11.5.7.3 Editing SVP File............................................................................. 239
11.5.8 Tide Stations ........................................................................................... 239
11.5.8.1 Tide Station Editor ......................................................................... 240
11.5.8.2 Tide Station Editor Toolbar and Context Menu ............................. 241
11.6 Log Data Database ........................................................................................... 244
11.7 Multimedia Database ........................................................................................ 246
11.7.1 GeoTIFF Images ..................................................................................... 246
11.7.1.1 Raster Editor .................................................................................. 247
11.8 Report Database .............................................................................................. 248
11.9 Sonar Targets Database .................................................................................. 248
11.10 Icon Images Database.................................................................................... 248
12 Acquisition 251
12.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 251
12.2 Start Acquisition ................................................................................................ 251
12.2.1 Simulation ............................................................................................... 251
12.2.2 Realtime .................................................................................................. 251
12.3 Data Visualization ............................................................................................. 252
12.3.1 Layout ..................................................................................................... 252
12.4 Acquisition Menu Bar and Toolbar ................................................................... 254
12.4.1 Selecting Guidance ................................................................................. 259
12.4.1.1 Making Runlines or Routes Real Time .......................................... 260
12.5 Logging ............................................................................................................. 260
12.5.1 Check the Logging .................................................................................. 261
12.6 Shortcuts........................................................................................................... 262
12.6.1 F-Keys ..................................................................................................... 263
12.6.2 Attribute Actions ...................................................................................... 265
12.6.2.1 Attach to Button ............................................................................. 266
12.6.3 Manual Input Actions .............................................................................. 267
12.6.4 View Attribute Actions ............................................................................. 267
12.6.5 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................... 270
12.7 Presentations .................................................................................................... 270
13 Views 271
13.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 271
13.2 3D View ............................................................................................................ 272
13.2.1 3D View – Online .................................................................................... 273
13.2.2 3D View – Online Dredge ....................................................................... 274
13.2.3 3D View – Toolbar and Context Menu .................................................... 275
13.2.4 3D View – Layers .................................................................................... 277
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  vii

13.2.5 3D View – Properties .............................................................................. 278
13.3 Alerts View ....................................................................................................... 278
13.3.1 Error Messages ...................................................................................... 279
13.4 Compass View ................................................................................................. 280
13.4.1 Compass – Properties ............................................................................ 280
13.5 Device Configuration Views ............................................................................. 280
13.5.1 Device Configuration – RESON-7K View ............................................... 281
13.5.1.1 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Settings ........................................... 281
13.5.1.2 RESON SeaBat 7K – Ocean Menu .............................................. 282
13.5.1.3 RESON SeaBat 7K – Data Recording .......................................... 283
13.5.2 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat View .................................... 284
13.5.2.1 RESON HydroBat – Multibeam Settings ...................................... 284
13.5.2.2 RESON HydroBat – Ocean Menu................................................. 285
13.6 Dredge Views ................................................................................................... 286
13.6.1 Dredge – Bars Horizontal View .............................................................. 286
13.6.2 Dredge – Bars Vertical View .................................................................. 287
13.6.3 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View.............................................. 287
13.6.3.1 Flow/Concentration Meter – Properties ........................................ 288
13.6.4 Dredge – Load and Draught View .......................................................... 289
13.6.5 Dredge – SCADA View........................................................................... 290
13.6.5.1 SCADA – Properties ..................................................................... 290
13.7 Dredge Status View ......................................................................................... 290
13.8 Echosounder Graphical Trace View ................................................................ 291
13.8.1 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Toolbar ............................................... 292
13.8.2 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Settings............................................... 293
13.8.2.1 General Page ................................................................................ 294
13.8.2.2 Advanced Page ............................................................................. 294
13.8.2.3 Color Page .................................................................................... 295
13.8.2.4 Channels Page.............................................................................. 296
13.8.2.5 Paper Page ................................................................................... 297
13.8.2.6 Various Page................................................................................. 298
13.8.2.7 Communication Page .................................................................... 298
13.9 Helmsman View ............................................................................................... 299
13.9.1 Helmsman – Toolbar and Context Menu................................................ 299
13.9.2 Helmsman – Properties .......................................................................... 300
13.10 Icon Image View............................................................................................. 301
13.11 Interval Logging View ..................................................................................... 302
13.12 Laser Scan Control View ............................................................................... 302
13.12.1 Laser Scan – MDL View ....................................................................... 303
13.12.2 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View ........................................................ 303
13.13 Manual Input View.......................................................................................... 304
13.14 Messages Views ............................................................................................ 305
13.14.1 Messages – HydroBat or Messages – SeaBat 7K View ...................... 305
13.14.1.1 Main Page ................................................................................... 305
13.14.1.2 Event Page.................................................................................. 306
13.14.1.3 BITE Page ................................................................................... 306
13.14.2 Messages – I/O Port View .................................................................... 306
13.14.3 Messages – System Messages View ................................................... 307
13.15 Multibeam QC Views...................................................................................... 307
13.15.1 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View ....................................................... 307
viii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

13.15.2 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile View .................. 312
13.15.3 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View ........................................................ 312
13.15.4 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors View ............ 315
13.15.5 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors View ................................... 316
13.15.5.1 Vertical Total Propagation Error .................................................. 316
13.15.5.2 Horizontal Total Propagation Error .............................................. 317
13.15.5.3 List of Standard Deviations of the TPE’s ..................................... 318
13.15.6 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View ............................................... 320
13.15.7 Multibeam QC – Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................ 321
13.15.8 Multibeam QC – Properties................................................................... 323
13.15.9 Multibeam Filters View .......................................................................... 324
13.15.9.1 Depth and Range Filter ............................................................... 327
13.15.9.2 Intersection and Slope Filter ........................................................ 327
13.15.9.3 Flying Object Filter....................................................................... 328
13.15.9.4 Nadir Filter ................................................................................... 328
13.15.9.5 Statistic Filter ............................................................................... 330
13.15.9.6 IHO Error Filter ............................................................................ 330
13.15.9.7 Smart Filter .................................................................................. 331
13.16 Multibeam Video View .................................................................................... 334
13.16.1 Multibeam Video – Toolbar and Context Menu .................................... 335
13.17 Numerics View ................................................................................................ 335
13.17.1 Numerics – Standard View ................................................................... 335
13.17.1.1 Numerics Alarm ........................................................................... 336
13.17.2 Numerics – Sonar Targets View ........................................................... 337
13.18 Obstacle Avoidance ........................................................................................ 338
13.18.1 Obstacle Avoidance – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 338
13.19 Output Control View ....................................................................................... 340
13.20 Pipe Lay Views ............................................................................................... 340
13.20.1 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View .................................................................. 341
13.20.2 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View .............................................................. 342
13.20.3 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View ............................................................... 343
13.21 Plan Views ...................................................................................................... 343
13.21.1 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars ................................................... 344
13.21.2 Plan View – Dredge Instruction ............................................................ 345
13.21.3 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning ......................................................... 346
13.21.4 Plan View – General Dredge Operation ............................................... 347
13.21.5 Plan View – Navigation ......................................................................... 348
13.21.6 Plan View – Production ......................................................................... 349
13.21.7 Plan View – Survey Coverage .............................................................. 350
13.21.8 Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................................... 350
13.21.8.1 Sonar Target Options in Plan Views ........................................... 355
13.21.8.2 User Maps ................................................................................... 355
13.21.9 Plan View – Layer Control .................................................................... 358
13.21.10 Plan View – Properties........................................................................ 359
13.21.11 Coverage Settings .............................................................................. 361
13.22 Positioning System XY – Manual Input View ................................................. 362
13.23 Profile Views ................................................................................................... 363
13.23.1 Profile – Grid Model View ..................................................................... 364
13.23.2 Profile – Multibeam View ...................................................................... 364
13.23.3 Profile – Projected Runline View .......................................................... 365
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  ix

13.23.4 Profile – Realtime Design View ............................................................ 366
13.23.5 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View................................................. 367
13.23.6 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View .......................................... 367
13.23.7 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View ................................................. 368
13.23.8 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View .................................................... 369
13.23.9 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical View ....................................... 369
13.23.10 Profile – Sound Velocity View ............................................................ 370
13.23.11 Profile – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................................... 370
13.23.12 Profile – Properties ............................................................................. 372
13.24 Raw Data View ............................................................................................... 373
13.24.1 Drag & Drop .......................................................................................... 374
13.25 Scatterplot View ............................................................................................. 374
13.26 Sonar Targets View........................................................................................ 376
13.26.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 377
13.27 Sonar Views ................................................................................................... 378
13.27.1 Sonar – Sidescan View ........................................................................ 378
13.27.2 Sonar – Snippets View ......................................................................... 379
13.27.3 Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu ..................................................... 379
13.27.3.1 TVG ............................................................................................. 380
13.27.3.2 Auto Scaling ................................................................................ 380
13.27.3.3 Speed Correction ........................................................................ 380
13.27.3.4 Slant Range Correction ............................................................... 381
13.27.3.5 Lambert’s Law Correction ........................................................... 381
13.27.3.6 Sonar Target Options in Sonar Views ........................................ 381
13.27.4 Sonar – Bathy View .............................................................................. 381
13.27.4.1 Sonar Bathy – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................. 382
13.28 Status Views .................................................................................................. 383
13.28.1 Status – Alarms View ........................................................................... 384
13.28.2 Status – Computations View ................................................................ 384
13.28.3 Status – Equipment View ..................................................................... 385
13.28.4 Status – Logging View .......................................................................... 385
13.28.5 Status – Remote Connections View ..................................................... 386
13.29 Tide Manual Input View ................................................................................. 386
13.30 Time Series View ........................................................................................... 387
13.30.1 Time Series – Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................... 387
14 Replay 389
14.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 389
14.1.1 Controlling the Replayer ......................................................................... 389
14.1.2 External Replay Settings ........................................................................ 390
14.1.3 Saving Layout and Vessel Configuration ............................................... 391
14.1.4 Recomputation and Saving Results ....................................................... 391
15 Processing 393
15.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 393
15.2 Validating and Presenting Survey Results ....................................................... 393
16 Editing 395
16.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 395
16.1.1 Available Editors ..................................................................................... 395
x  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

16.2 Open Editing ..................................................................................................... 396
16.2.1 Selecting a File Set ................................................................................. 397
16.2.2 Select the Editors .................................................................................... 398
16.2.2.1 Active Editor .................................................................................. 399
16.2.3 Selecting Points ...................................................................................... 399
16.2.4 Editing Toolbar ........................................................................................ 399
16.2.4.1 Jumping ......................................................................................... 399
16.2.4.2 Play Options .................................................................................. 400
16.2.4.3 Undo – Redo ................................................................................. 400
16.2.4.4 Edit Mode ...................................................................................... 400
16.2.4.5 Auto Recache ................................................................................ 400
16.2.4.6 Find Exceptional Data ................................................................... 401
16.2.5 Tools Options .......................................................................................... 401
16.2.5.1 Modify Vessel Configuration .......................................................... 402
16.2.5.2 Select Vessel Configuration .......................................................... 402
16.2.5.3 Compare Vessel Configurations .................................................... 403
16.2.5.4 Transponder Position Update ........................................................ 404
16.2.5.5 Print File Status ............................................................................. 404
16.2.5.6 Apply Tide Data ............................................................................. 404
16.2.5.7 Data Source Switch ....................................................................... 405
16.2.5.8 Cable Route Generation ................................................................ 407
16.2.5.9 Multibeam Statistics Report ........................................................... 409
16.2.5.10 Import POSPac............................................................................ 409
16.2.5.11 Import TerraPos........................................................................... 410
16.2.5.12 Quick Calibration ......................................................................... 410
16.2.5.13 Generate TPE Results File .......................................................... 411
16.2.5.14 Validate All Caches ..................................................................... 413
16.2.5.15 Force Recache Selected Item ..................................................... 413
16.2.5.16 Revert To Original ....................................................................... 414
16.2.5.17 Repair File ................................................................................... 414
16.2.5.18 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps ............................................. 415
16.2.5.19 Force Recache GPS Positions .................................................... 415
16.3 Editing Data ...................................................................................................... 416
16.3.1 Editing Multibeam Data in a 3D View ..................................................... 416
16.3.2 Editing Data Points ................................................................................. 416
16.4 3D Box View ..................................................................................................... 417
16.4.1 3D Box Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................ 418
16.5 3D View ............................................................................................................ 421
16.5.1 3D View – Standard Toolbar and Context Menu .................................... 422
16.5.1.1 Beam Color Mode.......................................................................... 425
16.5.2 3D View – Standard Properties .............................................................. 426
16.5.3 3D View – Standard Layers .................................................................... 427
16.6 Data Source Switching ..................................................................................... 428
16.6.1 Edit Data Source Switches ..................................................................... 429
16.6.1.1 Insert a Data Source Switch .......................................................... 429
16.6.1.2 Modify a Data Source Switch ........................................................ 430
16.6.2 Data Source Switching Toolbar and Context Menu ................................ 430
16.7 Dekdienst .......................................................................................................... 432
16.8 Line-Based Editing ........................................................................................... 433
16.8.1 Select Data for the Line-Based Editing ................................................... 433
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xi

16.8.2 Line-Based Editing – Standard View ...................................................... 434
16.8.3 Line-Based Editing – Multiline View ....................................................... 436
16.8.4 Line-Based Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ..................................... 436
16.9 Messages ......................................................................................................... 438
16.10 Multibeam Area Editing .................................................................................. 438
16.10.1 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View ............................................. 438
16.10.2 CUBE Model Mode ............................................................................... 439
16.10.2.1 CUBE .......................................................................................... 439
16.10.2.2 Create a CUBE Model ................................................................ 441
16.10.2.3 Information of the CUBE Model .................................................. 442
16.10.2.4 Editing the CUBE Model ............................................................. 443
16.10.2.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with a CUBE Model ........................... 444
16.10.2.6 Export the CUBE Model .............................................................. 445
16.10.2.7 Sync the CUBE Model ................................................................ 446
16.10.3 Grid Model Mode .................................................................................. 446
16.10.3.1 Create a Grid Model .................................................................... 447
16.10.3.2 Information of the Grid Model ..................................................... 449
16.10.3.3 Editing the Grid Model ................................................................ 451
16.10.3.4 Remove Spikes in the Grid Model .............................................. 452
16.10.3.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with Grid Model .................................. 454
16.10.3.6 Export the Grid Model ................................................................. 455
16.10.3.7 Sync the Grid Model ................................................................... 455
16.10.4 Multibeam Filter Mode .......................................................................... 456
16.10.5 Multibeam Calibration Mode ................................................................. 459
16.10.6 Pipe Detection Mode ............................................................................ 460
16.10.6.1 Create Pipe Route ...................................................................... 461
16.10.6.2 Pipe Edit Mode ............................................................................ 462
16.10.7 Sound Velocity Editor Mode ................................................................. 463
16.10.8 Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ............................ 465
16.11 Numerics View ............................................................................................... 476
16.11.1 Numerics – Sonar Targets View ........................................................... 476
16.12 Ping View ....................................................................................................... 476
16.12.1 Ping Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................... 479
16.13 Position Editing .............................................................................................. 481
16.13.1 Position Editing – Standard Toolbar and Context Menu ...................... 481
16.13.2 Selecting Position Data for Editing ....................................................... 484
16.13.3 Dead Reckoning ................................................................................... 484
16.14 Profile View .................................................................................................... 484
16.14.1 Profile Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................ 485
16.15 Sonar .............................................................................................................. 488
16.15.1 Sonar View Toolbar and Context Menu ............................................... 489
16.16 Sonar Targets View........................................................................................ 491
16.16.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 492
16.17 Tide Station .................................................................................................... 493
16.17.1 Tide Station – Viewer ........................................................................... 493
16.18 Time-Based Editing ........................................................................................ 494
16.18.1 Select Data for the Time-Based Editing ............................................... 494
16.18.2 Time-Based Editing – Standard View................................................... 495
16.18.3 Time-Based Editing – Echogram View ................................................. 496
16.18.4 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph View ........................................... 497
xii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

16.18.5 Time-Based Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ................................... 497
17 Create Model 499

17.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 499
17.1.1 Create Model Toolbar and Context Menu............................................... 500
17.1.2 Model Preview Layer Properties ............................................................. 501
17.2 Importing Data .................................................................................................. 502
17.2.1 Selecting Data Files ................................................................................ 502
17.2.2 Data File Parameters .............................................................................. 503
17.2.2.1 Grid Model ..................................................................................... 504
17.2.2.2 PDS2000 Log Data........................................................................ 504
17.2.3 Preview ................................................................................................... 504
17.3 Create Grid or TIN Model ................................................................................. 504
17.3.1 Grid Model............................................................................................... 505
17.3.2 TIN Model................................................................................................ 505
18 Grid Model 507

18.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 507
18.2 Grid Model Editor .............................................................................................. 508
18.2.1 Grid Model View Toolbar and Context Menu .......................................... 509
18.3 Actions .............................................................................................................. 511
18.3.1 Create Page ............................................................................................ 511
18.3.2 Info Page ................................................................................................. 514
18.3.3 Edit Page................................................................................................. 516
18.3.4 Filter Page ............................................................................................... 517
18.3.5 Update Page ........................................................................................... 519
18.3.5.1 Update with Grid Model ................................................................. 519
18.3.5.2 Update with 3D Model ................................................................... 520
18.3.6 Export Page ............................................................................................ 520
18.3.6.1 Export to ASCII .............................................................................. 521
18.3.6.2 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid ............................................................ 521
18.3.6.3 Export to OpenGIS ........................................................................ 522
18.3.6.4 Export to GeoTIFF ......................................................................... 522
18.3.6.5 Generate Update Package ............................................................ 522
18.3.7 Import Page ............................................................................................ 523
18.3.8 Operations Page ..................................................................................... 525
18.3.8.1 Generate Color Table .................................................................... 525
18.3.8.2 Apply Z Corrections ....................................................................... 526
18.3.8.3 Set/Clear Value ............................................................................. 526
18.3.8.4 Make Empty................................................................................... 527
18.3.8.5 Create Resampled Model .............................................................. 528
18.3.8.6 Create Difference Model ............................................................... 528
18.3.8.7 Compute Volumes ......................................................................... 530
18.3.8.8 Extract Profiles .............................................................................. 533
18.3.9 Interpolate Page ...................................................................................... 534
18.3.9.1 Clean Interpolated ......................................................................... 535
18.3.9.2 Interpolate Circular ........................................................................ 535
18.3.9.3 Interpolate Triangular .................................................................... 536
18.3.9.4 Interpolate Directional ................................................................... 536
18.3.9.5 Interpolate Singlebeam ................................................................. 537
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xiii

19 TIN Model Viewer 539
19.1 General ............................................................................................................ 539
19.1.1 Drag & Drop ............................................................................................ 539
19.2 TIN Model Viewer Menu Bar ............................................................................ 540
19.2.1 File .......................................................................................................... 540
19.2.2 Edit.......................................................................................................... 541
19.2.3 Tools ....................................................................................................... 541
19.2.3.1 Decimate Model ............................................................................ 541
19.2.3.2 Filter Triangles .............................................................................. 543
19.2.3.3 Generate Contours ....................................................................... 544
19.3 TIN Model Viewer Toolbar ............................................................................... 544
19.4 TIN Model Viewer Context Menu ..................................................................... 544
20 Plot 547
20.1 Getting Started ................................................................................................. 547
20.1.1 Create a Plot Project .............................................................................. 547
20.1.2 Add Data Files ........................................................................................ 549
20.1.3 Place a Plan View ................................................................................... 549
20.1.4 Create a Plot ........................................................................................... 551
20.1.5 Place Panels ........................................................................................... 553
20.1.6 Add Layers ............................................................................................. 554
20.1.7 Print or Export a Plot .............................................................................. 554
20.2 How Plotting Works .......................................................................................... 555
20.2.1 Regeneration .......................................................................................... 555
20.2.2 Panel and Layer Order ........................................................................... 556
20.2.3 Overwrite Suppression ........................................................................... 556
20.2.4 Templates ............................................................................................... 557
20.2.5 Keywords ................................................................................................ 557
20.3 Available Panels ............................................................................................... 557
20.3.1 Plan Panel .............................................................................................. 558
20.3.2 North Arrow Panel .................................................................................. 559
20.3.3 Profile Panel ........................................................................................... 560
20.3.4 Profile Volume ........................................................................................ 561
20.3.5 Profile Series Panel ................................................................................ 564
20.3.6 Profile Cross Series Panel...................................................................... 565
20.3.7 Profile Info Panel .................................................................................... 566
20.3.8 Text Block Panel and Text Box .............................................................. 566
20.3.9 DXF Panel .............................................................................................. 567
20.3.10 Color Mapping Panel ............................................................................ 568
20.3.11 Image Panel ......................................................................................... 568
20.3.12 Key Map Panel ..................................................................................... 569
20.3.13 Scale Bar Panel .................................................................................... 569
20.4 Available Layers ............................................................................................... 570
20.4.1 Clipping Polygon Layer........................................................................... 571
20.4.2 CMap Layer ............................................................................................ 571
20.4.3 Dredge Track Layer ................................................................................ 572
20.4.4 DXF Layer .............................................................................................. 572
20.4.5 Events Layer ........................................................................................... 573
20.4.6 Event Markers Layer .............................................................................. 573
20.4.7 Geographic Grid Layer ........................................................................... 573
xiv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

20.4.8 GLW Grid Layer ...................................................................................... 574
20.4.9 Grid Model Layer .................................................................................... 575
20.4.10 Grid Model Contour Layer..................................................................... 576
20.4.11 Grid Model Difference Layer ................................................................. 577
20.4.12 Grid Model Profile Layer ....................................................................... 578
20.4.13 Grid Model Profile Statistics Layer ........................................................ 579
20.4.14 KP Grid Layer ....................................................................................... 580
20.4.15 Log Data Layer ..................................................................................... 580
20.4.16 Log Data Profile Layer .......................................................................... 581
20.4.17 PDS1000 Electronic Chart Layer .......................................................... 581
20.4.18 Pipe Profile Layer .................................................................................. 582
20.4.19 Plan Views Layer .................................................................................. 582
20.4.20 Raster Layer ......................................................................................... 583
20.4.21 Route Layer .......................................................................................... 583
20.4.22 Runlines Layer ...................................................................................... 583
20.4.23 Satellite Geographic Grid Layer ............................................................ 584
20.4.24 Sonar Targets ....................................................................................... 584
20.4.25 Streak Lines Layer ................................................................................ 585
20.4.26 Text Layer ............................................................................................. 586
20.4.27 Theoretical Model Layer ....................................................................... 586
20.4.28 TIN Model Layer ................................................................................... 587
20.4.29 TIN Model Contour Layer...................................................................... 587
20.4.30 User Map Layer .................................................................................... 588
20.4.31 Waypoints Layer ................................................................................... 589
20.4.32 Work Areas Layer ................................................................................. 590
20.4.33 XY Grid Layer ....................................................................................... 590
20.5 DXF Export Wizard ........................................................................................... 591
20.5.1 Output DXF File Page ............................................................................. 593
20.5.2 Select Data Page .................................................................................... 594
20.5.3 Plan Panel Page ..................................................................................... 595
20.5.4 Log Data Page ........................................................................................ 595
20.5.4.1 Log Data Settings Page ................................................................ 596
20.5.5 Grid Model Page ..................................................................................... 597
20.5.5.1 Grid Model Settings ....................................................................... 597
20.5.6 Contours Page ........................................................................................ 598
20.5.6.1 Contours Settings Page ................................................................ 598
20.5.7 Runlines Page ......................................................................................... 599
20.5.7.1 Runlines Settings Page ................................................................. 599
20.5.8 Waypoints Page ...................................................................................... 600
20.5.8.1 Waypoints Settings Page .............................................................. 600
20.5.9 Options and Preview Page ..................................................................... 601
21 End Area Volumes 603

21.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 603
21.1.1 Operation Method ................................................................................... 603
21.2 Volume Computation ........................................................................................ 604
21.2.1 Volume Computation Wizard .................................................................. 604
21.2.2 Setup ....................................................................................................... 607
21.2.2.1 Views in the End Area Volumes .................................................... 607
21.2.3 Volumes .................................................................................................. 608
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xv

21.2.3.1 The Table of the Volumes ............................................................. 608
21.2.4 Vertical Areas ......................................................................................... 609
21.2.5 Report ..................................................................................................... 610
21.2.5.1 Comma Separated Report ............................................................ 610
21.2.5.2 Standard Report ............................................................................ 611
22 Export 613
22.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 613
22.1.1 Export Configuration File ........................................................................ 613
22.1.2 Export Type ............................................................................................ 614
22.2 Export Window ................................................................................................. 615
22.2.1 Excel and Comma Separated ................................................................ 615
22.2.2 Simrad EM Datagram ............................................................................. 617
22.2.3 Multibeam XYZ ....................................................................................... 618
22.2.4 XTF ......................................................................................................... 620
22.2.5 S7K ......................................................................................................... 622
22.2.6 SDS ........................................................................................................ 622
22.2.7 SZ ........................................................................................................... 623
22.2.8 Magnetometer DAT ................................................................................ 624
22.2.9 FAU......................................................................................................... 625
22.2.10 GSF ...................................................................................................... 625
22.3 Exporting .......................................................................................................... 625
xvi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

Figures
Figure 3-1 Welcome page of the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard ....................................................... 13
Figure 3-2 Type of setup in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard .......................................................... 13
Figure 3-3 Update C-Map SDK software ............................................................................................ 14
Figure 3-4 Repair or Remove PDS2000 in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard .................................. 15
Figure 3-5 File structure of PDS2000 ................................................................................................. 15
Figure 3-6 Device Manager window with the Moxa extender card ..................................................... 18
Figure 3-7 Port settings for a COM port .............................................................................................. 18
Figure 3-8 Welcome page of the Found New Hardware Wizard ........................................................ 19
Figure 3-9 Install page of the Found New Hardware Wizard .............................................................. 19
Figure 3-10 The About Control Center window where the PDS2000 dongle can be updated ............. 20
Figure 3-11 Dongle Update information window................................................................................... 21
Figure 3-12 The All Dongles.dk4 file ..................................................................................................... 21
Figure 3-13 The separate patch for the dongle update ........................................................................ 22
Figure 3-14 Remote Presentation window with PDS-Develop-5 as the main computer ...................... 23
Figure 3-15 Connections window with a connection to the remote PC (RESON) ................................ 23
Figure 3-16 Setup dialog ....................................................................................................................... 24
Figure 3-17 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the eToken dongle and the C-
Map software ..................................................................................................................... 25
Figure 3-18 eToken dongle selection ................................................................................................... 25
Figure 3-19 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the C-Map software .......................... 26
Figure 3-20 Welcome page of the C-Map Professional SDK Runtime Setup wizard ........................... 26
Figure 3-21 Installation folder for the C-Map software ......................................................................... 27
Figure 3-22 Confirm the installation of the C-Map software ................................................................. 27
Figure 3-23 Calibrate the screen diagonal ............................................................................................ 28
Figure 3-24 C-Map user setup dialog ................................................................................................... 28
Figure 3-25 Confirmation to remove licenses ....................................................................................... 28
Figure 3-26 Last page of the C-Map installation wizard ....................................................................... 29
Figure 3-27 eToken dongle driver and C-Map software is installed ..................................................... 29
Figure 3-28 C-Map Chart Manager with the Databases page .............................................................. 30
Figure 3-29 Database registration is successful ................................................................................... 30
Figure 3-30 C-Map Chart Manager with the registered database ........................................................ 31
Figure 3-31 C-Map Chart Manager with the Professional+ database set as default ............................ 31
Figure 3-32 System Info page of the C-Map Chart Manager ............................................................... 32
Figure 3-33 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager .................................................................... 33
Figure 3-34 Add License Manually window to add the license code(s) ................................................ 33
Figure 3-35 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager with a license for a zone. ........................... 34
Figure 3-36 C-Map Chart Manager ....................................................................................................... 34
Figure 3-37 Database is updated ......................................................................................................... 35
Figure 3-38 Professional+ database is updated ................................................................................... 35
Figure 3-39 License is updated for new database ................................................................................ 35
Figure 3-40 Layers window with a C-Map layer.................................................................................... 36
Figure 3-41 C-Map Layer Properties .................................................................................................... 36
Figure 3-42 Select language for the installation ................................................................................... 38
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xvii

Figure 3-43 Welcome page of the Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard ........................................................ 38
Figure 3-44 The installation folder for the Navigis software ................................................................. 39
Figure 3-45 Additional tasks ................................................................................................................. 39
Figure 3-46 Ready to install the software ............................................................................................. 40
Figure 3-47 The installation of the software ......................................................................................... 40
Figure 3-48 The Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard is finished ................................................................... 41
Figure 3-49 Welcome page of the Tresco Kernel Setup Wizard .......................................................... 41
Figure 3-50 Installation folder of the kernel .......................................................................................... 42
Figure 3-51 Folder exist........................................................................................................................ 42
Figure 3-52 Additional task ................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 3-53 Ready to install the kernel ................................................................................................. 43
Figure 3-54 Screen width ..................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 3-55 Layers window with a Tresco layer ................................................................................... 44
Figure 3-56 Tresco Layer Properties .................................................................................................... 45
Figure 4-1 Docking ............................................................................................................................. 48
Figure 4-2 Docking context menu ...................................................................................................... 48
Figure 4-3 Dock areas ........................................................................................................................ 49
Figure 4-4 Context menu in the Acquisition ....................................................................................... 49
Figure 4-5 Context menu of a Plan View............................................................................................ 50
Figure 5-1 Project structures .............................................................................................................. 54
Figure 5-2 Select Project window with the option Run the New Project wizard checked .................. 55
Figure 5-3 Start of the new project wizard.......................................................................................... 56
Figure 5-4 Project Configuration window ........................................................................................... 57
Figure 5-5 Project description ............................................................................................................ 57
Figure 5-6 Units dialog ....................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 5-7 Coordinate System information ......................................................................................... 58
Figure 5-8 Formats dialog .................................................................................................................. 59
Figure 5-9 Log Files settings .............................................................................................................. 59
Figure 5-10 Selected file types for a backup ........................................................................................ 61
Figure 5-11 Set when the oldest log data files have to be deleted ...................................................... 61
Figure 5-12 Select the alerts sounds for the alarms ............................................................................ 62
Figure 5-13 Select the options ............................................................................................................. 62
Figure 5-14 Leap seconds as a GPS time parameter .......................................................................... 63
Figure 5-15 Sonar Targets file selection and list with classifications ................................................... 63
Figure 5-16 Icon Images file selection .................................................................................................. 64
Figure 5-17 Select Application Type .................................................................................................... 64
Figure 5-18 Run Configuration Wizard page ........................................................................................ 65
Figure 5-19 Vessels page to add or select the vessels ........................................................................ 66
Figure 5-20 Select a vessel (configuration) or create a new vessel..................................................... 66
Figure 5-21 Select a Remote Vessel and download the vessel configuration ..................................... 67
Figure 5-22 Layouts page of the configuration ..................................................................................... 67
Figure 5-23 Layout dialog ..................................................................................................................... 68
Figure 5-24 Events page of the configuration ...................................................................................... 68
Figure 5-25 Alarms page in the configuration ...................................................................................... 69
Figure 5-26 Last page of the new project wizard ................................................................................. 70
Figure 6-1 Project Configuration with the option Coordinate System ................................................ 72
Figure 6-2 New Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard .................................... 73
Figure 6-3 Select Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard ................................. 74
Figure 6-4 Ellipsoids page of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................................................ 75
Figure 6-5 Select an ellipsoid from the list of available ellipsoids in PDS2000 .................................. 75
xviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 6-6 Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard ....................................... 76
Figure 6-7 Select Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................ 77
Figure 6-8 Datum Transformation Parameters of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................. 78
Figure 6-9 Geoid Model page of the Coordinate System Wizard ....................................................... 79
Figure 6-10 Unit page of the Coordinate System Wizard ..................................................................... 81
Figure 6-11 New Unit dialog to create a new unit type ......................................................................... 81
Figure 6-12 Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard ........................................................... 82
Figure 6-13 Select Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard ................................................ 83
Figure 6-14 Projection Parameters page of the Coordinate System Wizard ........................................ 84
Figure 6-15 Post Correction page of the Coordinate System Wizard................................................... 85
Figure 6-16 Save Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard ................................... 86
Figure 6-17 Coordinate System Overview page of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................. 87
Figure 6-18 Select Coordinate System window with only the user defined coordinate systems ......... 88
Figure 6-19 Edit Coordinate System window with an user defined coordinate system ........................ 88
Figure 7-1 First page of the new vessel wizard .................................................................................. 92
Figure 7-2 Geometry page of the vessel configuration ....................................................................... 93
Figure 7-3 Vessel coordinate system ................................................................................................. 94
Figure 7-4 Vessel Contour editor ........................................................................................................ 95
Figure 7-5 Equipment page of the vessel configuration ..................................................................... 96
Figure 7-6 Device Test ........................................................................................................................ 98
Figure 7-7 Navisound Control Center to set the port(s) and check the communication with the
echo sounder ..................................................................................................................... 99
Figure 7-8 Output Messages window ............................................................................................... 100
Figure 7-9 Computations page in the vessel configuration .............................................................. 101
Figure 7-10 Advanced Computations page ........................................................................................ 102
Figure 7-11 Data Sources page in the vessel configuration ............................................................... 103
Figure 7-12 Condition added .............................................................................................................. 104
Figure 7-13 Creating a condition......................................................................................................... 104
Figure 7-14 Tools page with the Anchor Definition page of the cutter dredge application ................. 106
Figure 7-15 Tools page with the Crane Configuration page of the excavator application .................. 107
Figure 7-16 Tools page with the Rope page of the rope excavator application ................................. 108
Figure 7-17 Tools page with the Cutter configuration page ................................................................ 109
Figure 7-18 Tools page with the Dredge Logging Settings page of the excavator application .......... 110
Figure 7-19 Tools page with the Interval Logging page of a cutter dredge application ...................... 111
Figure 7-20 The Tools page with the Magnetometer Dialog page of the maggy survey
application ....................................................................................................................... 113
Figure 7-21 Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction hopper
application ....................................................................................................................... 114
Figure 7-22 Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing suction hopper
application for two bunkers .............................................................................................. 115
Figure 7-23 Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction hopper application .... 116
Figure 7-24 Logging page in the vessel configuration ........................................................................ 117
Figure 7-25 Log File Index in the logging page for PDS2000 format ................................................. 118
Figure 7-26 Backup log in the logging page for PDS2000 format ...................................................... 118
Figure 7-27 PDS2000 Grid Model setup in the logging page ............................................................. 119
Figure 7-28 Cleaned XYZ logging reduction in the Logging page ...................................................... 119
Figure 7-29 Grid model input for the production ................................................................................. 120
Figure 7-30 Dredge track sampling rate ............................................................................................. 120
Figure 7-31 File name for the DXF file ................................................................................................ 120
Figure 7-32 Grid model input for backscatter grid model logging ....................................................... 121
Figure 7-33 7K logging reduction ........................................................................................................ 122
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xix

Figure 7-34 Backup log in the logging page for S7K format .............................................................. 122
Figure 7-35 FAU 1 or FAU 2 format for the FAU logging ................................................................... 123
Figure 7-36 Uncorrected or fully corrected multibeam data selection for the GSF logging ............... 124
Figure 7-37 Log space management ................................................................................................. 125
Figure 7-38 Logging conditions .......................................................................................................... 126
Figure 7-39 Create new log file .......................................................................................................... 126
Figure 7-40 Simulation page in the vessel configuration ................................................................... 127
Figure 7-41 Alias page in the vessel configuration with an alias for NMEA GGA .............................. 128
Figure 7-42 Alarms page in the vessel configuration ......................................................................... 129
Figure 7-43 Alarms window with an alarm ......................................................................................... 129
Figure 7-44 Conditions window with an alarm .................................................................................... 130
Figure 7-45 Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an attribute can be
selected ........................................................................................................................... 130
Figure 8-1 Route page in the guidance ............................................................................................ 132
Figure 8-2 Route editor..................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 8-3 Route Properties for the standard route (left) and for the pipe / cable route (right) ........ 134
Figure 8-4 Example of an exported route ......................................................................................... 135
Figure 8-5 First page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route ........................................................... 136
Figure 8-6 Second page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route ..................................................... 136
Figure 8-7 Last page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route ........................................................... 137
Figure 8-8 Runlines page in the guidance........................................................................................ 138
Figure 8-9 Runlines editor ................................................................................................................ 139
Figure 8-10 Waypoints page in the guidance ..................................................................................... 141
Figure 8-11 Waypoints editor ............................................................................................................. 142
Figure 8-12 Waypoint Properties in the waypoints editor ................................................................... 143
Figure 8-13 Design Model page in the guidance ............................................................................... 143
Figure 8-14 3D Design Model editor .................................................................................................. 144
Figure 8-15 A checked 3D model with errors ..................................................................................... 145
Figure 8-16 Cutter Dredge page in the guidance ............................................................................... 146
Figure 8-17 Work Areas page in the guidance ................................................................................... 147
Figure 8-18 Restricted Areas page in the guidance ........................................................................... 148
Figure 8-19 Restricted Areas editor ................................................................................................... 148
Figure 8-20 Vessel Placement page in the guidance ......................................................................... 149
Figure 8-21 Placement Points editor .................................................................................................. 150
Figure 8-22 Dredge Instruction page in the guidance ........................................................................ 151
Figure 8-23 Dredge Instruction Editor ................................................................................................ 151
Figure 8-24 Object Distance page in the guidance ............................................................................ 152
Figure 8-25 Views in the Acquisition that have an alarm frame with text ........................................... 153
Figure 9-1 Mode page of the Events page ....................................................................................... 155
Figure 9-2 Conditions menu ............................................................................................................. 156
Figure 9-3 Event Definition editor ..................................................................................................... 157
Figure 9-4 Field definition for a separator delimited message ......................................................... 158
Figure 9-5 Field definition for a fixed field message ......................................................................... 159
Figure 9-6 Select Data in the event definition editor ........................................................................ 160
Figure 9-7 Data Source page of the events ..................................................................................... 160
Figure 9-8 Select Data item for the position source ......................................................................... 161
Figure 9-9 Numbering page of the events ........................................................................................ 161
Figure 10-1 Help menu of the Control Center .................................................................................... 164
Figure 10-2 Clock Synchronization window with a selected clock device .......................................... 166
Figure 10-3 Clock synchronization is activated in the Connections window ...................................... 167
Figure 10-4 Icon in the taskbar with its context menu ................................................................... 167
xx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 10-5 Interfacing window ........................................................................................................... 168
Figure 10-6 Example of an IP-address for a XSE server ................................................................... 169
Figure 10-7 Example of a network settings for a socket communication port .................................... 169
Figure 10-8 Example of the settings for a serial port .......................................................................... 170
Figure 10-9 Example of the settings for a R7K communication ......................................................... 171
Figure 10-10 Example of the settings for a RGL communication ......................................................... 171
Figure 10-11 Example of the settings for a R7KI communication ........................................................ 171
Figure 10-12 Example of the settings for a R7K communication ......................................................... 172
Figure 10-13 OPC server has to be selected for the OPC communication .......................................... 172
Figure 10-14 Example of the settings for an Edgetech communication ............................................... 173
Figure 10-15 PDS2000 Import Utility .................................................................................................... 174
Figure 10-16 First page of the Single Beam XYZ Import ...................................................................... 175
Figure 10-17 ASCII File Options page in the import configuration ....................................................... 176
Figure 10-18 Runline Options page in the import configuration ........................................................... 176
Figure 10-19 File Selection page in the import configuration ............................................................... 177
Figure 10-20 Import file settings for the import data file ....................................................................... 178
Figure 10-21 Calendar .......................................................................................................................... 178
Figure 10-22 ASCII parsing in the import configuration ........................................................................ 179
Figure 10-23 Settings for parsing the XYZ data ................................................................................... 180
Figure 10-24 Select the delimited columns in the data file ................................................................... 181
Figure 10-25 Select the month in the date column ............................................................................... 182
Figure 10-26 XTF Import page .............................................................................................................. 183
Figure 10-27 S7K Import page.............................................................................................................. 184
Figure 10-28 Text file with the offsets values for the offsets dialog ...................................................... 185
Figure 10-29 Offsets dialog in the Import ............................................................................................. 185
Figure 10-30 SZ Import page ................................................................................................................ 186
Figure 10-31 Simrad EM3000 Import page .......................................................................................... 187
Figure 10-32 Batch Plot ........................................................................................................................ 189
Figure 10-33 Quick Profile Plot with a plot project and a plot template selected ................................. 191
Figure 10-34 Tab Filesets in the Quick Profile Plot .............................................................................. 191
Figure 10-35 Tab DTM in the Quick Profile Plot ................................................................................... 192
Figure 10-36 Tab Design in the Quick Profile Plot................................................................................ 192
Figure 10-37 Tab Text in the Quick Profile Plot .................................................................................... 193
Figure 10-38 Still 176 DXF files has to be created ............................................................................... 194
Figure 10-39 Manual Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator ........................................... 195
Figure 10-40 TM grid convergence ....................................................................................................... 196
Figure 10-41 Advance Manual Conversion page in the Geo Calculator .............................................. 197
Figure 10-42 Compute 3 Shift Parameters page in the Geo Calculator ............................................... 198
Figure 10-43 File Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator ................................................. 199
Figure 10-44 User Accounts window .................................................................................................... 200
Figure 10-45 User dialog ...................................................................................................................... 201
Figure 10-46 Manage user level access window with the two default access levels, Administrator
and Basic Operator.......................................................................................................... 201
Figure 10-47 Add user access level dialog ........................................................................................... 202
Figure 10-48 Manage user level access window with new user level .................................................. 202
Figure 10-49 New user account with the new user level ...................................................................... 203
Figure 10-50 User accounts can be changed ....................................................................................... 203
Figure 10-51 Language tab in Options window .................................................................................... 204
Figure 10-52 Message to restart PDS2000 to made the new language active .................................... 204
Figure 10-53 Message when Control Center is started ........................................................................ 205
Figure 10-54 Power management check tab in Options window ......................................................... 205
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxi

Figure 10-55 Power management check with everything is OK .......................................................... 206
Figure 10-56 Power management check with one check failed ........................................................... 206
Figure 10-57 General Settings tab in the Options window ................................................................... 207
Figure 11-1 Explorer with the different context menus ....................................................................... 210
Figure 11-2 General context menu ..................................................................................................... 211
Figure 11-3 File group context menu ................................................................................................. 213
Figure 11-4 File context menu ............................................................................................................ 213
Figure 11-5 File group context menu of C-MAP Databases .............................................................. 215
Figure 11-6 File context menu of the C-MAP Databases ................................................................... 216
Figure 11-7 Convert S-57 to C-Map dialog ........................................................................................ 217
Figure 11-8 Store HW ID for S-63 support ......................................................................................... 218
Figure 11-9 Install permits for S-63 support ....................................................................................... 218
Figure 11-10 SA Certificate information for S-63 support .................................................................... 218
Figure 11-11 File context menu of the BSB Charts (KAP) ................................................................... 220
Figure 11-12 File group context menu of the Clipping Polygons ......................................................... 220
Figure 11-13 File context menu of the Clipping Polygons .................................................................... 220
Figure 11-14 File group context menu of the Runlines ........................................................................ 222
Figure 11-15 File context menu of the Runlines................................................................................... 222
Figure 11-16 File group context menu of the Track Guidance Routes ................................................ 223
Figure 11-17 File context menu of the Waypoints ................................................................................ 224
Figure 11-18 Clipping Polygon editor ................................................................................................... 225
Figure 11-19 Color Table generator with a color table added (between 0 and -5) to the existing
color table........................................................................................................................ 226
Figure 11-20 Color table with the option from 0 to -2 ....................................................................... 227
Figure 11-21 Color table with the option from 0 to -2 ....................................................................... 228
Figure 11-22 Color Table Entry ............................................................................................................ 229
Figure 11-23 Value -1.10 is added to the color table ........................................................................... 229
Figure 11-24 Color table for bottom classification ................................................................................ 230
Figure 11-25 Color Table Entry for the bottom classification color table.............................................. 230
Figure 11-26 Dredge differential color table generator ........................................................................ 231
Figure 11-27 Contour definition generator ........................................................................................... 232
Figure 11-28 Contour Properties .......................................................................................................... 232
Figure 11-29 Generate Contours ......................................................................................................... 233
Figure 11-30 Design Profile Template editor ........................................................................................ 233
Figure 11-31 Exclude Areas editor with one excluded area ................................................................. 234
Figure 11-32 Profile Design Model Editor with runlines ....................................................................... 235
Figure 11-33 Add a template to a design model .................................................................................. 235
Figure 11-34 Profile Design Model Editor with a route ......................................................................... 236
Figure 11-35 Select a template for the profile design model ................................................................ 237
Figure 11-36 Sound Velocity Profile Editor .......................................................................................... 238
Figure 11-37 Tide Station editor ........................................................................................................... 240
Figure 11-38 Tide Station information .................................................................................................. 240
Figure 11-39 Edit Tide Values editor .................................................................................................... 242
Figure 11-40 Time Range Setting dialog .............................................................................................. 243
Figure 11-41 Import window for ASCII tide files ................................................................................... 243
Figure 11-42 Tide Station Report generator......................................................................................... 244
Figure 11-43 A tool tip of a PDS2000 logdata file ................................................................................ 245
Figure 11-44 File context menu of the PDS2000 Log Data ................................................................. 245
Figure 11-45 Log File info of a PDS2000 log data file ......................................................................... 245
Figure 11-46 File group context menu of the Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images ............. 246
Figure 11-47 Raster Editor with a satellite image................................................................................. 247
xxii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 11-48 Enter the local grid coordinates for the selected location................................................ 247
Figure 12-1 Context menu in the Acquisition ...................................................................................... 252
Figure 12-2 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views ......................................... 252
Figure 12-3 Add Display to add a view ............................................................................................... 253
Figure 12-4 Add Display in the context menu ..................................................................................... 253
Figure 12-5 3D Object Manager ......................................................................................................... 256
Figure 12-6 Dialog for the log file names ............................................................................................ 257
Figure 12-7 Tool Select Dialog ........................................................................................................... 258
Figure 12-8 Measure with dredge tool dialogs .................................................................................... 258
Figure 12-9 Select a runline ................................................................................................................ 260
Figure 12-10 Overview of the default Defined Keyboard Shortcuts ..................................................... 262
Figure 12-11 Customize window with the toolbars page ...................................................................... 262
Figure 12-12 Commands page in the customize window ..................................................................... 263
Figure 12-13 Default properties for the F-keys ..................................................................................... 263
Figure 12-14 Select Attribute window to select an equipment attribute ............................................... 265
Figure 12-15 Attach an attribute through the Raw Data view ............................................................... 265
Figure 12-16 Select Data window ......................................................................................................... 266
Figure 12-17 Attach an attribute to a F-key .......................................................................................... 266
Figure 12-18 Select Data window to select a manual input device ...................................................... 267
Figure 12-19 Select View window to select a view in the Acquisition ................................................... 267
Figure 12-20 Select Layer window to select the layer in the view ........................................................ 268
Figure 12-21 Select View Attribute window to select an attribute in the view ...................................... 268
Figure 12-22 Attach an attribute from the layer properties ................................................................... 269
Figure 12-23 Attach an attribute from the view properties .................................................................... 269
Figure 12-24 Shortcut Keys page of the Customize window ................................................................ 270
Figure 12-25 Assign a shortcut key to the selected macro ................................................................... 270
Figure 13-1 3D View – Online with multibeam and laser scan data ................................................... 273
Figure 13-2 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated active grid model ....... 274
Figure 13-3 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated active grid model
with a dredge differential color table ................................................................................ 275
Figure 13-4 Measure window.............................................................................................................. 276
Figure 13-5 Coverage Settings view of the 3D View .......................................................................... 277
Figure 13-6 Alerts view with several timeouts .................................................................................... 278
Figure 13-7 Alarm indicator in the status bar ...................................................................................... 279
Figure 13-8 Compass view with True Heading, CMG and Waypoint heading ................................... 280
Figure 13-9 Sonar Settings for the Device Configuration ................................................................... 281
Figure 13-10 Ocean Menu for the Device Configuration – RESON-7K view ....................................... 282
Figure 13-11 Data Recording for the Device Configuration – RESON-7K view ................................... 283
Figure 13-12 Multibeam Settings of the Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view .................... 284
Figure 13-13 Ocean Menu of the Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view .............................. 285
Figure 13-14 Dredge – Bars Horizontal view with two attributes .......................................................... 286
Figure 13-15 Dredge – Bars Vertical view with two attributes .............................................................. 287
Figure 13-16 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view for two suction tubes ..................................... 287
Figure 13-17 Dredge – Load and Draught view with the Load page .................................................... 289
Figure 13-18 Dredge – SCADA view with two suction tubes ................................................................ 290
Figure 13-19 Dredge Status view with Sailing full as dredge status ..................................................... 290
Figure 13-20 Echosounder Graphical Trace view with four channels .................................................. 291
Figure 13-21 Magnify window with the zoom option 2x ........................................................................ 292
Figure 13-22 Print window of the snapshot with a start and end marker ............................................. 293
Figure 13-23 General page of the Settings ........................................................................................... 294
Figure 13-24 Advanced page of the Settings ....................................................................................... 294
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxiii

Figure 13-25 Color page of the Settings .............................................................................................. 295
Figure 13-26 Channel page of the Settings.......................................................................................... 296
Figure 13-27 Paper page of the Settings ............................................................................................. 297
Figure 13-28 Various page of the Settings ........................................................................................... 298
Figure 13-29 Communication page of the Settings .............................................................................. 298
Figure 13-30 Helmsman view with a runline ........................................................................................ 299
Figure 13-31 Icon Image view with an image of a vessel .................................................................... 301
Figure 13-32 Interval Logging view with 2 items with the sampling method ........................................ 302
Figure 13-33 Laser Scan Control View for the MDL laser scan ........................................................... 303
Figure 13-34 Laser Scan Control View for the Riegl Z Series laser scan ............................................ 303
Figure 13-35 Manual Input – Dredge Status view with all the dredge statuses and delays ................ 304
Figure 13-36 Main Page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view .............................................................. 305
Figure 13-37 Event page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view ............................................................. 306
Figure 13-38 BITE page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view .............................................................. 306
Figure 13-39 Messages – I/O Port view with incoming data ................................................................ 306
Figure 13-40 Messages – System Messages view with information.................................................... 307
Figure 13-41 Multibeam QC- 3D Seafloor view with the raw data in the display mode Quality ........... 308
Figure 13-42 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with the multibeam xyz computation in the
display mode Quality ....................................................................................................... 308
Figure 13-43 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Detection .................................... 309
Figure 13-44 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth Dots ................................. 309
Figure 13-45 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth Grid ................................. 310
Figure 13-46 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth Sample Grid .................... 310
Figure 13-47 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope Grid .................................. 311
Figure 13-48 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope Sample Grid..................... 311
Figure 13-49 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view with the multibeam xyz
computation and all four the multipings .......................................................................... 312
Figure 13-50 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the raw data in the color mode Quality ............. 313
Figure 13-51 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the multibeam xyz computation in the color
mode Quality ................................................................................................................... 313
Figure 13-52 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with one ping in the color mode Detection
Process ........................................................................................................................... 314
Figure 13-53 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with multipings in the color mode Sequence
number ............................................................................................................................ 314
Figure 13-54 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view with the color mode
Quality and the vertical and horizontal TPE’s ................................................................. 315
Figure 13-55 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view with the vertical and horizontal
TPE’s and IHO errors ...................................................................................................... 316
Figure 13-56 Vertical error diagram ..................................................................................................... 317
Figure 13-57 Horizontal error diagram ................................................................................................. 318
Figure 13-58 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view with the multibeam data item Quality .............. 320
Figure 13-59 Multibeam Filters view .................................................................................................... 324
Figure 13-60 Depth and Range filters .................................................................................................. 327
Figure 13-61 Intersection and Slope filters ........................................................................................... 327
Figure 13-62 Flying Object Filter .......................................................................................................... 328
Figure 13-63 Port and Starboard Angle Nadir filter .............................................................................. 328
Figure 13-64 Incidence angle ............................................................................................................... 329
Figure 13-65 Angle to the detection point ............................................................................................ 329
Figure 13-66 Port and Starboard Distance Nadir filter ......................................................................... 329
Figure 13-67 Statistic filter with 3x3 beams .......................................................................................... 330
Figure 13-68 Parameters for the smart filter ........................................................................................ 331
Figure 13-69 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with interferometry data ........................................... 332
xxiv  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 13-70 Interferometry data with the four areas ........................................................................... 332
Figure 13-71 Interferometry data with the averaging clips and the average depths ............................ 333
Figure 13-72 Interferometry data with the tolerance areas ................................................................... 334
Figure 13-73 Multibeam Video view of the RESON SeaBat 8125 with a depth filter ........................... 334
Figure 13-74 Example of a Numerics – Standard view ........................................................................ 335
Figure 13-75 Configuration window for the Numerics – Standard view shown above ......................... 336
Figure 13-76 Alarm Definition dialog for an item in the Numerics view ................................................ 337
Figure 13-77 Numerics – Sonar Targets view ...................................................................................... 337
Figure 13-78 Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking view ................................................................. 338
Figure 13-79 Output Control view for the RESON SeaBat 8125 .......................................................... 340
Figure 13-80 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view with the J-Lay tower, the criteria and the pipe. ................... 341
Figure 13-81 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and the detected pipe
for the Pipe Position Monitor application ......................................................................... 342
Figure 13-82 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and the detected pipe
for the Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay application ............................................................... 342
Figure 13-83 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view with the pipe position for the Pipe Position Monitor
application ....................................................................................................................... 343
Figure 13-84 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars ............................................................................. 344
Figure 13-85 Plan View – Dredge Instruction with a dredge instruction ............................................... 345
Figure 13-86 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning with a bull’s eye and a waypoint ................................ 346
Figure 13-87 Plan View – General Dredge Operation with an updated grid model ............................. 347
Figure 13-88 Plan View – Navigation with a C-Map layer .................................................................... 348
Figure 13-89 Plan View – Production with a production grid model ..................................................... 349
Figure 13-90 Plan View – Survey Coverage with an active grid model ................................................ 350
Figure 13-91 Measure window in the plan views .................................................................................. 351
Figure 13-92 Measure Relative Vessel window.................................................................................... 351
Figure 13-93 Measure Relative window ............................................................................................... 351
Figure 13-94 Find C-Map object in the plan view ................................................................................. 353
Figure 13-95 C-MAP Object Information window with a radio calling point .......................................... 353
Figure 13-96 Context menu in the Edit Mode and without user maps.................................................. 355
Figure 13-97 Context menu in the Edit Mode with the user maps options ........................................... 356
Figure 13-98 Select a symbol from the list in the Select User Symbol window .................................... 356
Figure 13-99 Context menu after editing or selecting an object ........................................................... 357
Figure 13-100 Layers window for one of the plan views ........................................................................ 358
Figure 13-101 Properties window for most of the plan views ................................................................. 359
Figure 13-102 Plan View with an off-center of -100% (left) and +100% (right) with a vessel radius
of 10 ................................................................................................................................. 360
Figure 13-103 Coverage Settings window for the plan views ................................................................. 361
Figure 13-104 Positioning System XY – Manual Input view ................................................................... 362
Figure 13-105 Profile – Grid Model view derived from the ‘Draw Profile’ option in the plan view .......... 364
Figure 13-106 Profile – Multibeam view with an active grid model profile .............................................. 364
Figure 13-107 Profile – Projected Runline view with a profile ................................................................ 365
Figure 13-108 Single beam echo sounder filters .................................................................................... 365
Figure 13-109 Profile – Realtime Design view with a right view of a suction hopper and the design
difference as up/down indicator ....................................................................................... 366
Figure 13-110 Profile – Realtime Design view with a left and a back view for an excavator ................. 366
Figure 13-111 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view with a design model ........................................... 367
Figure 13-112 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen with an active grid model, an active design
model, dredge limits and level contacts .......................................................................... 367
Figure 13-113 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view with a grid model and a design model ................ 368
Figure 13-114 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view with a top and side view of the trailing suction
hopper with a drag head .................................................................................................. 369
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxv

Figure 13-115 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view with a top and side view of the trailing
suction hopper with a drag head ..................................................................................... 369
Figure 13-116 Profile – Sound Velocity view of the active sound velocity profile .................................. 370
Figure 13-117 Properties for the Profile – Realtime Design view .......................................................... 372
Figure 13-118 Raw Data view of the Multibeam xyz computation ......................................................... 373
Figure 13-119 Data item ‘GPS mode’ can be moved with the ‘Drag & Drop’ method ........................... 374
Figure 13-120 Scatterplot view ............................................................................................................... 374
Figure 13-121 Reference Point window to enter or select the reference position ................................. 375
Figure 13-122 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three different views ............. 376
Figure 13-123 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view ................................................................... 377
Figure 13-124 Sonar – Sidescan view with for color palette rust and gray ............................................ 378
Figure 13-125 Sonar – Snippets view with for color palette rust and gray ............................................. 379
Figure 13-126 Sonar – Bathy view of the 7125 in simulation mode ....................................................... 382
Figure 13-127 Status – Alarms view ...................................................................................................... 384
Figure 13-128 Status – Computations view with not working computations .......................................... 384
Figure 13-129 Status – Equipment view with no data for some equipment ........................................... 385
Figure 13-130 Status – Logging view with the logging on ...................................................................... 385
Figure 13-131 Status – Remote Connections view ................................................................................ 386
Figure 13-132 Tide Manual Input view ................................................................................................... 386
Figure 13-133 Time Series view with two graphs stacked ..................................................................... 387
Figure 14–1 Replayer toolbar with a file set bar.................................................................................. 389
Figure 14–2 Replayer toolbar with a vessel bar .................................................................................. 390
Figure 14–3 Select the external files for the replay ............................................................................. 390
Figure 16-1 Editing with two editors ................................................................................................... 396
Figure 16-2 File Set Editor to select or create a file set. .................................................................... 397
Figure 16-3 Selected files for a file set ............................................................................................... 397
Figure 16-4 Context menu in the Editing ............................................................................................ 398
Figure 16-5 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views in the Editing ................... 398
Figure 16-6 Add Display window to add an editor .............................................................................. 398
Figure 16-7 Add Display in the context menu of the Editing .............................................................. 399
Figure 16-8 Find window .................................................................................................................... 401
Figure 16-9 Apply the modified vessel configuration ......................................................................... 402
Figure 16-10 Vessel Selection Dialog to select a different vessel configuration .................................. 402
Figure 16-11 Vessel Selection Dialog with an invalid active vessel configuration ............................... 403
Figure 16-12 Dialog when active vessel configuration is different from the other vessel
configurations .................................................................................................................. 403
Figure 16-13 Dialog when there is no difference in the vessel configurations ..................................... 404
Figure 16-14 Transponder position update for the slave vessel .......................................................... 404
Figure 16-15 Apply tide ........................................................................................................................ 405
Figure 16-16 Data source selection page of the Data Source Switch Wizard ..................................... 406
Figure 16-17 Data groups page of the Data Source Switch Wizard .................................................... 406
Figure 16-18 Data elements page of the Data Source Switch Wizard ................................................. 407
Figure 16-19 Cable Route Dialog to generate a cable route ................................................................ 408
Figure 16-20 Dialog for the multibeam statistics report ........................................................................ 409
Figure 16-21 POSPac selection dialog ................................................................................................ 410
Figure 16-22 Quick Calibration ............................................................................................................. 411
Figure 16-23 Generate TPE Results File ............................................................................................. 412
Figure 16-24 Part of the depth errors table .......................................................................................... 412
Figure 16-25 Example of a depth error graph ...................................................................................... 413
Figure 16-26 Dialog for Validate ALL Caches ...................................................................................... 413
Figure 16-27 Dialog for recaching ........................................................................................................ 414
xxvi  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 16-28 Dialog for revert to original data ...................................................................................... 414
Figure 16-29 Repair the logdata file(s) ................................................................................................. 415
Figure 16-30 Dialog to fix the time stamp ‘Time in Message’ ............................................................... 415
Figure 16-31 Dialog to do a force recache of the GPS positions ......................................................... 415
Figure 16-32 3D Box view with a grid model and multibeam data ....................................................... 418
Figure 16-33 3D View – Standard with the cross and high-resolution data ......................................... 422
Figure 16-34 Spotlight window.............................................................................................................. 422
Figure 16-35 3D View – Standard with a measure window with a distance, bearing and a
elevation between two points .......................................................................................... 423
Figure 16-36 Properties of the 3D View – Standard ............................................................................. 426
Figure 16-37 Layers of the 3D View – Standard................................................................................... 427
Figure 16-38 Layers which can be added to the 3D View – Standard ................................................. 427
Figure 16-39 Data Source Switching editor .......................................................................................... 429
Figure 16-40 Data Source Switch Editor .............................................................................................. 430
Figure 16-41 Dekdienst view ................................................................................................................ 432
Figure 16-42 Dekdienst Channel Manager with the items for the Dekdienst view ............................... 432
Figure 16-43 Line-Based Editing – Standard, with two stacked data channels ................................... 434
Figure 16-44 Properties (left) and Channel Properties (right) to select and enable a second file
set .................................................................................................................................... 434
Figure 16-45 Channel Properties of the channel data to select a design model type .......................... 435
Figure 16-46 Line-Based Editing – Standard; with second file set and a profile of a grid model ......... 435
Figure 16-47 Line-Based Editing – Multiline, with three surveys over the same runline ...................... 436
Figure 16-48 Messages – System Messages view with information for the Editing ............................. 438
Figure 16-49 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a CUBE model and multibeam data
both in depth color mode ................................................................................................. 439
Figure 16-50 Create page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ........... 441
Figure 16-51 Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ................ 442
Figure 16-52 Edit page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with
one of the edit modes selected ....................................................................................... 443
Figure 16-53 Filter page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .............. 444
Figure 16-54 Export page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ............ 445
Figure 16-55 Sync page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .............. 446
Figure 16-56 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a grid model in depth color mode ........... 447
Figure 16-57 Create page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ............... 447
Figure 16-58 Info page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................... 449
Figure 16-59 Cell info window for the selected area............................................................................. 450
Figure 16-60 Edit page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................... 451
Figure 16-61 Filter page to remove spikes in the grid model in the mUltibeam Area Editing –
Standard view .................................................................................................................. 452
Figure 16-62 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color .............................................. 453
Figure 16-63 Beam Filter page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ........ 454
Figure 16-64 Export page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ................ 455
Figure 16-65 Sync page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................. 455
Figure 16-66 Filter page for the multibeam filters in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ...... 457
Figure 16-67 Calibration mode with a Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view and the three
Profile views .................................................................................................................... 459
Figure 16-68 Pipe Detection mode in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a
detected pipe ................................................................................................................... 460
Figure 16-69 Create page to create a pipe route in the pipe mode of the Multibeam Area Editing
– Standard view ............................................................................................................... 461
Figure 16-70 Correlation filter with a pipe diameter .............................................................................. 461
Figure 16-71 Edit pipe option in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................................... 463
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxvii

Figure 16-72 Svp Edit Profile view with a sound velocity profile view on the left and a profile view
on the right with above the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ............................ 464
Figure 16-73 CUBE model with the number of hypotheses as color mode ......................................... 467
Figure 16-74 CUBE model with the main surface strength as color mode .......................................... 467
Figure 16-75 CUBE model with the depth as color mode .................................................................... 468
Figure 16-76 CUBE model with the hit count as color mode ............................................................... 468
Figure 16-77 CUBE model with the uncertainty as color mode ........................................................... 469
Figure 16-78 Hypothesis 1 surface of the CUBE model with the selected data in main surface as
color mode ...................................................................................................................... 469
Figure 16-79 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color .......................................................... 471
Figure 16-80 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with BSR=50 and BRR=50 .......... 472
Figure 16-81 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with BSR=20 and BRR=80 .......... 473
Figure 16-82 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color + Intensity ......................................... 473
Figure 16-83 Laser scan data with the Beam Color Mode Depth ........................................................ 474
Figure 16-84 Numerics – Sonar Targets view ...................................................................................... 476
Figure 16-85 Ping view with one ping .................................................................................................. 477
Figure 16-86 Ping view with 5 pings ..................................................................................................... 477
Figure 16-87 Side Ping view with 100 pings ........................................................................................ 478
Figure 16-88 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with 250 highlighted pings which are
displayed in the Ping view ............................................................................................... 478
Figure 16-89 Position Editing – Standard ............................................................................................. 481
Figure 16-90 Position Editing – Standard with the tracks colored with their GPS status ..................... 483
Figure 16-91 Profile view with multibeam data and a grid model ......................................................... 485
Figure 16-92 Sonar – Sidescan view ................................................................................................... 488
Figure 16-93 Sonar – Snippets view .................................................................................................... 489
Figure 16-94 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three different views ............. 491
Figure 16-95 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view ................................................................... 492
Figure 16-96 Tide Station – Viewer with two tide stations ................................................................... 493
Figure 16-97 Time-Based Editing – Standard ...................................................................................... 495
Figure 16-98 Time-Based Editing – Echogram view with 2 echo sounder channels with graphical
trace information ............................................................................................................. 496
Figure 16-99 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph .............................................................................. 497
Figure 17-1 Create Model with a preview of a model ......................................................................... 499
Figure 17-2 Model Preview Layer Properties window ........................................................................ 501
Figure 17-3 Select the types of data files ........................................................................................... 502
Figure 17-4 Select Caris HDCS data ................................................................................................. 503
Figure 17-5 Additional information for data files ................................................................................. 503
Figure 17-6 Grid model data type selection for the Grid Model ......................................................... 504
Figure 17-7 Computation selection for PDS2000 log files ................................................................. 504
Figure 17-8 Data Reduction - dynamic gridding for a TIN model ....................................................... 505
Figure 18-1 3D grid model in the Grid Model Editor ........................................................................... 508
Figure 18-2 Spotlight window ............................................................................................................. 509
Figure 18-3 Create page to create a grid model ................................................................................ 512
Figure 18-4 Info page with information of the grid model ................................................................... 514
Figure 18-5 Edit page to edit the grid model data .............................................................................. 516
Figure 18-6 Filter page to remove spikes ........................................................................................... 517
Figure 18-7 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color .............................................. 518
Figure 18-8 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation ....................................... 519
Figure 18-9 Update with a different grid model .................................................................................. 519
Figure 18-10 Update with a 3D model .................................................................................................. 520
Figure 18-11 Data type and clipping polygon selection in the Export page ......................................... 521
xxviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 18-12 Export to ASCII ................................................................................................................ 521
Figure 18-13 Export to ASCII ESRI grid ............................................................................................... 521
Figure 18-14 Export to OpenGIS .......................................................................................................... 522
Figure 18-15 Export to GeoTIFF ........................................................................................................... 522
Figure 18-16 Update package .............................................................................................................. 522
Figure 18-17 Import page to import data in a grid model ..................................................................... 523
Figure 18-18 Generate a color table for the grid model ........................................................................ 525
Figure 18-19 Apply Z corrections to the grid model .............................................................................. 526
Figure 18-20 Set/Clear values of the grid model .................................................................................. 526
Figure 18-21 Make empty ..................................................................................................................... 527
Figure 18-22 Grid model filter criteria ................................................................................................... 527
Figure 18-23 Create a resampled model .............................................................................................. 528
Figure 18-24 Create a difference model ............................................................................................... 528
Figure 18-25 Create Report dialog (left for the PDF report and right for the CSV report) .................... 531
Figure 18-26 Volume Computation Results .......................................................................................... 532
Figure 18-27 Extract profiles ................................................................................................................. 533
Figure 18-28 Destination for the extracted profiles ............................................................................... 534
Figure 18-29 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation ........................................ 535
Figure 18-30 Interpolate circular ........................................................................................................... 535
Figure 18-31 Interpolate triangular........................................................................................................ 536
Figure 18-32 Interpolate directional ...................................................................................................... 536
Figure 18-33 Interpolate singlebeam .................................................................................................... 537
Figure 19–1 TIN Model Viewer with a TIN model ................................................................................ 539
Figure 19–2 TIN model properties ....................................................................................................... 540
Figure 19–3 Empty cache .................................................................................................................... 541
Figure 19–4 Decimation parameters ................................................................................................... 541
Figure 19–5 Feature angle .................................................................................................................. 542
Figure 19–6 Simple vertex ................................................................................................................... 542
Figure 19–7 Interior edge vertex.......................................................................................................... 543
Figure 19–8 Boundary vertex .............................................................................................................. 543
Figure 19–9 Contour interval parameters ............................................................................................ 544
Figure 20-1 Plot project wizard ........................................................................................................... 548
Figure 20-2 Plot overview window ...................................................................................................... 548
Figure 20-3 Context menu of the overview tree and overview plot .................................................... 549
Figure 20-4 Data added to the overview ............................................................................................. 549
Figure 20-5 Plan View Properties in the overview .............................................................................. 550
Figure 20-6 Overview with a plan view ............................................................................................... 550
Figure 20-7 Create a new plot ............................................................................................................ 551
Figure 20-8 Plot Properties window .................................................................................................... 551
Figure 20-9 New blank plot ................................................................................................................. 552
Figure 20-10 Context menu of the plot tree and the plot view .............................................................. 553
Figure 20-11 Plan panel properties ...................................................................................................... 553
Figure 20-12 Plot with panels and layers .............................................................................................. 554
Figure 20-13 Regenerating a plot ......................................................................................................... 555
Figure 20-14 Regeneration errors......................................................................................................... 555
Figure 20-15 Overwrite suppression in action; behind the easting text are no depth values plotted ... 556
Figure 20-16 Example of a plan panel .................................................................................................. 558
Figure 20-17 Mapping page of the plan panel properties ..................................................................... 558
Figure 20-18 Sample of a north arrow .................................................................................................. 559
Figure 20-19 North Arrow page of the north arrow panel properties .................................................... 559
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxix

Figure 20-20 Sample of a profile panel ................................................................................................ 560
Figure 20-21 Horizontal and Vertical pages of the profile panel properties ......................................... 560
Figure 20-22 Sample of a profile volume panel.................................................................................... 561
Figure 20-23 A box with one profile volume ......................................................................................... 561
Figure 20-24 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile volume panel properties ............. 562
Figure 20-25 Design model page of the profile volume properties ...................................................... 562
Figure 20-26 Design line and colors page of the profile volume properties ......................................... 563
Figure 20-27 Survey data and colors page of the profile volume properties ....................................... 563
Figure 20-28 Sample of a profile series panel...................................................................................... 564
Figure 20-29 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel properties ............... 564
Figure 20-30 Sample of profile cross series panel ............................................................................... 565
Figure 20-31 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series panel properties ..... 565
Figure 20-32 Sample of a profile info panel ......................................................................................... 566
Figure 20-33 Profile Info page of the profile info panel properties ....................................................... 566
Figure 20-34 Sample of a text block panel with two text boxes ........................................................... 566
Figure 20-35 Text page of the text box properties ............................................................................... 567
Figure 20-36 DXF page of the DXF panel properties ........................................................................... 567
Figure 20-37 Sample of a color mapping panel ................................................................................... 568
Figure 20-38 Color Table page of the color mapping panel properties ................................................ 568
Figure 20-39 Image page of the image panel properties ..................................................................... 568
Figure 20-40 Sample of a key map panel with the current plot highlighted ......................................... 569
Figure 20-41 Sample of a scale bar panel ........................................................................................... 569
Figure 20-42 Scale Bar page of the scale bar panel properties ........................................................... 569
Figure 20-43 Polygon page of the clipping polygon properties ............................................................ 571
Figure 20-44 CMap settings page of the CMap properties .................................................................. 571
Figure 20-45 Data page of the dredge track properties ....................................................................... 572
Figure 20-46 Text Size page of the DXF properties ............................................................................. 572
Figure 20-47 Line Style page of the DXF properties ............................................................................ 573
Figure 20-48 Grid page of the geographic grid properties ................................................................... 573
Figure 20-49 GLW 3D Model page of the GLW grid properties ........................................................... 574
Figure 20-50 Cells page of the grid model properties .......................................................................... 575
Figure 20-51 Contouring page of the grid model contour properties ................................................... 576
Figure 20-52 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with the option Show
labels checked ................................................................................................................ 576
Figure 20-53 Design Model page of the grid model difference properties ........................................... 577
Figure 20-54 Options page of the grid model profile properties ........................................................... 578
Figure 20-55 Options page of the grid model profile statistics properties ............................................ 579
Figure 20-56 Grid page of the KP grid properties ................................................................................ 580
Figure 20-57 Options page of the log data properties .......................................................................... 580
Figure 20-58 Options page of the log data profile properties ............................................................... 581
Figure 20-59 Options page of the pipe route properties ...................................................................... 582
Figure 20-60 Plan Views page of the plan views properties ................................................................ 582
Figure 20-61 Labels page of the route properties ................................................................................ 583
Figure 20-62 Runlines page of the runlines properties ........................................................................ 583
Figure 20-63 Grid page of the satellite geographic grid properties ...................................................... 584
Figure 20-64 Options page of the sonar targets properties ................................................................. 585
Figure 20-65 Marker options page of the streak lines properties ......................................................... 585
Figure 20-66 Options page of the theoretical model properties ........................................................... 586
Figure 20-67 Cells page of the TIN model properties .......................................................................... 587
Figure 20-68 Contouring page of the TIN model contour properties.................................................... 587
xxx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 20-69 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with the option Show
labels checked ................................................................................................................. 588
Figure 20-70 Text Size page of the user map properties ..................................................................... 588
Figure 20-71 Line Style page of the user map properties .................................................................... 589
Figure 20-72 Options page of the waypoints properties ....................................................................... 589
Figure 20-73 Options page of the work areas properties ..................................................................... 590
Figure 20-74 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the plan panel and key map panel .................... 590
Figure 20-75 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the different profile panels ................................. 591
Figure 20-76 Overview with a grid model ............................................................................................. 592
Figure 20-77 Plan View Properties with an exact size for the plan view .............................................. 592
Figure 20-78 Output DXF file page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................................. 593
Figure 20-79 The Select Data page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................................ 594
Figure 20-80 The Plan Panel page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................................. 595
Figure 20-81 The Log Data Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard .................................................. 596
Figure 20-82 The Grid Model Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................... 597
Figure 20-83 The Contours Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard .................................................. 598
Figure 20-84 The Runlines Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard .................................................. 599
Figure 20-85 The Waypoints Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................... 600
Figure 20-86 The Options and Preview page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................. 601
Figure 21-1 Horizontal area ................................................................................................................ 603
Figure 21-2 Delta Z ............................................................................................................................. 604
Figure 21-3 Volume Computation Wizard – Runlines......................................................................... 604
Figure 21-4 Volume Computation Wizard – Reference ...................................................................... 605
Figure 21-5 Volume Computation Wizard – Combine ........................................................................ 606
Figure 21-6 End Area Volumes with the Setup page.......................................................................... 607
Figure 21-7 End Area Volumes with the Volumes page ..................................................................... 608
Figure 21-8 End Area Volumes with the Vertical Areas page ............................................................ 609
Figure 21-9 End Area Volumes with the Report page ........................................................................ 610
Figure 22-1 Dialog in the Export window to select or create an export configuration file ................... 613
Figure 22-2 Selecting export type ....................................................................................................... 614
Figure 22-3 Export setup with a selected file set ................................................................................ 615
Figure 22-4 Options page for Excel and Comma Separated export................................................... 616
Figure 22-5 Data Selection page with an export list ........................................................................... 617
Figure 22-6 Options page for Simrad EM Datagram export ............................................................... 617
Figure 22-7 Options page for Multibeam points (ASCII) export .......................................................... 618
Figure 22-8 Options page for XTF export ........................................................................................... 620
Figure 22-9 First page of the XTF Settings Wizard ............................................................................ 620
Figure 22-10 Second page of the XTF Settings Wizard ....................................................................... 621
Figure 22-11 Last page of the XTF Settings Wizard............................................................................. 621
Figure 22-12 Options page for SDS export .......................................................................................... 622
Figure 22-13 SDS settings .................................................................................................................... 622
Figure 22-14 Options page for SZ export ............................................................................................. 623
Figure 22-15 Options page for Magnetometer export .......................................................................... 624
Figure 22-16 Options page for the FAU export..................................................................................... 625
Figure 22-17 Options page for the GSF export .................................................................................... 625
Figure 22-18 Save As dialog for the ‘Excel’ and the ‘Comma Separated’ export ................................. 626
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxxi

1 Introduction
1.1 PDS2000
PDS2000 is a software package for hydrographic survey and dredging
operations. It offers modules that cover the entire operation from
acquisition to an end product. The software runs on standard PC’s with
the Windows operating system. PDS2000 is available in different versions
tailored to specific operations.
The purpose of all the measurements is real time reading of data from
one or more sensors, make computations with the data, show the results
of the computations and simultaneously log the data. To be able to control
those processes a number of Views has been developed that will show
the reading, computations, results and logging processes. A view can
show the data either graphically or alpha-numerically.
Data needs to be checked after the measurements. PDS2000 gives
several options to remove anomalies and outliers, either manually or
automatically.
The final presentation of the cleaned data can be in the form of models,
tables, files, volumes, nautical charts and reports.
This manual is also available as a HTML Help file. Press F1 or select
Help > Help Topics to open the PDS2000 help files.
PDS2000 - User Manual Introduction  1

2 PDS2000 Documentation
2.1 Introduction
This chapter will give an overview of all the manuals that will be delivered
with a PDS2000 version.
All these documents are accessible as PDF via the Start menu of
Windows at the location Start > Reson > PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x > PDS2000
Documentation. The documents can also be found in the folder
‘C:\Program Files\RESON\PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x\manuals’.
2.2 Overview
The manuals are listed not in order of importance but in alphabetic order.
For each manual a brief explanation will be given.
2.2.1 Anchor Handling

Anchor Handling is a system that keeps track of the pontoon/barge
anchor positions, anchor wires and anchor planning. Anchor Handling can
be done in a stand-alone mode where the positions of the anchors are
maintained from the Pontoon only.
The Anchor Handling can also be used in an integrated mode with a tug
management where anchor requests are sent to the tugs and the anchor
positions are automatically transmitted from the tug when the anchor is
dropped or when the anchor is moved by the tug. There is an anchor
planning mode where the new anchor locations can be determined.
For more information see the file Anchor Handling.pdf.
2.2.2 Bar Sweep

A bar sweep survey is usually carried out to find minimum depths in an
area after a dredge operation
A bar is lowered underneath a survey vessel. It hangs on wires or chains
on both sides of the vessel, and is lowered to the minimum depth of the
area. By sailing the vessel around the area, shoals are found whenever
the bar hits something. The operator then presses a button (Event button)
and makes a record of the location of the shoal.
For more information see the file Bar Sweep.pdf.
PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  3

2.2.3 Boeilog
With Boeilog PDS2000 will assist in laying buoys or other markers.
PDS2000 will assist in the navigation to and at the work location. Once on
location tools are available for the exact position of the buoy, if needed
working with the DP of the vessel.
The documentation is in Dutch.
For more information see the file Boeilog.pdf.
2.2.3.1 Appendix Boeilog

Explanation of the improvements in PDS2000 made for the Boeilog
application.
For more information see the file Appendix Boeilog.pdf.
2.2.4 Boraciet
The Boraciet application is meant to monitor on the shore the work and
movements of the (dredging) vessel. To monitor this a GPRS link is made
between the vessel and on shore (called ‘wal server’). With this link it is
also possible to send data to the vessels. The ‘wal server’ is the central
place where the information of the different vessels comes together.
On shore the ‘wal server’ is connected by Ethernet with several PC’s
(called ‘wal clients’). On these ‘wal clients’ the activities of the vessels can
be monitored online. It is also possible to replay the activities of the
vessels on the ‘wal clients’.
For more information see the file Boraciet.pdf.
2.2.4.1 Addendum Boraciet

The system to send the tidal information to the vessels is modified, which
results in modifications in PDS2000. This with other small modifications is
explained in this addendum.
For more information see the file Addendum Boraciet.pdf.
2.2.5 Bottom Classification

In PDS2000 it is possible to create a bottom classification from the
snippets data of RESON SeaBats.
Before a bottom classification of the snippets data can be calculated, a
calibration value (offset) has to be determined. This value can be
determined before the survey starts by using a representative area or it
can be determined after the survey and applied to the logdata files.
After a calibration value is determined a model with bottom classification
information can be created from the snippets data and from a grid model
with depth information.
For more information see the file Bottom Classification.pdf.
4  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.6 Bucket Dredging
This application is for a project where for dredging a bucket dredger is
used.
The documentation contains an explanation on how to setup the project
for a bucket dredger and of the most used views in the Acquisition.
Also the calibration of the inclinometers on the bucket chain will be
explained.
For more information see the file Bucket Dredging.pdf.
2.2.7 Cable Lay

A cable lay in PDS2000 will use, next to the standard equipment setup
and standard views, some extra device drivers and a couple of extra
views in the Acquisition to support a cable lay.
The documentation contains only an explanation of these extra device
drivers and extra views.
For a cable lay in PDS2000 the application type should be ‘Multi-purpose
survey’.
For more information see the file Cable Lay.pdf.
2.2.8 Cutter Dredge

This application is for a project where a cutter is used for dredging.
The documentation contains an explanation on how to setup the project
for a cutter dredger and of the most used views in the Acquisition.
Also the calibration of the sensors on the ladder will be explained.
For more information see the file Cutter Dredge.pdf.
2.2.9 ES3
This document is made as an additional section in the ES3 User Manual
to explain the setup of PDS2000 for the Odom ES3.
The Odom ES3 and the other sensors (navigation, motion, heading and
sv probe) are interfaced to the RTA (Real Time Appliance) box. Therefore
in PDS2000 the setup of the clock synchronization and the interface to
the different sensors is different from the standard interfacing in
PDS2000.
For more information see the file ES3.pdf.
2.2.10 Excavator
The application type ‘Excavator’ is for a project where an excavator is
used for dredging.
A project with the application type ‘Excavator’ can contain one or two
vessels. For a one vessel project the vessel is the excavator and for a two
vessels project the vessels are the excavator and a pontoon on which the
excavator is located.
In this application manual the setup of an excavator project for a stand-
alone excavator and for an excavator on a pontoon will be discussed.
After the project is setup the separate tools of the excavator configuration

have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the boom, stick and the tools
(bucket, grab or pump) will be explained.
At the end the views in the Acquisition will be discussed and an answer to
some frequent ask questions about PDS2000 in relation with an
excavator application will be given.
For more information see the file Excavator.pdf.
2.2.11 Frequently Asked Questions

The Frequently Asked Questions are from clients that have questions
about matters related to PDS2000 or sensors interfaced with PDS2000.
In the document the questions are divided into different chapters.
For more information see the file FAQ.pdf.
2.2.12 HydroBat
The HydroBat is a multibeam system where the data collection and the
control of the HydroBat will take place in PDS2000.
An explanation of the setup of the HydroBat in the equipment list will be
discussed and the special views for the HydroBat in the Acquisition will be
explained.
For more information see the file HydroBat.pdf.
2.2.13 Interface Setup

This document is made as an additional document to explain for specific
sensors the interface setup in PDS2000.
It will explain how for these sensors the interface has to be setup. In most
cases this interface is not a standard setup. If necessary the interfacing in
the Equipment page of the vessel configuration is explained.
For the following sensors the interface with PDS2000 is explained:
 Odom – ES3
 Coda Echoscope
 Laser Riegl VZ-400
 Novatel SPAN
For more information see the file Interface Setup.pdf.
2.2.14 Multibeam
The Multibeam Survey application in the PDS2000 software is an
application type for a survey with one or more multibeam systems.
In this manual the equipment, which is necessary for a multibeam survey,
will be discussed and also how to setup PDS2000 for this type of survey.
For more information see the file Multibeam.pdf.
2.2.15 Multibeam Calibration

In PDS2000 the new Multibeam Calibration application is available from
version 3.7.0.0. onwards.

The steps of the multibeam calibration in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view will be explained.
For more information see the file Multibeam Calibration.pdf.
2.2.16 PDS2000 LiteView

The PDS2000 LiteView is a freeware viewer which can be used to view
PDS2000 data files. The viewer will read the PDS2000 logdata files, grid
models and 3D design models. The multibeam data will be extracted from
the logdata files and will be visible in the viewer.
The Area Viewer is a true viewer; this means that the data cannot be
adjusted in the viewer. For editing the data, the PDS2000 Editing module
in PDS2000 has to be used.
In the manual will be explained how to add data to the viewer and how the
parameters and settings in the viewer can be modified.
For more information see the file PDS2000 LiteView.pdf.
2.2.17 PDS2000 User Manual

This manual describes how PDS2000 has to be setup and configure in
general. For specific setups or configurations see the other manuals.
Next to that, the Acquisition and all possibilities to process the data (like
Editing or Grid Model Editor) with their possible views will be explained.
2.2.18 Pipe Detection

In PDS2000 with the multibeam data a pipe detection can be done in the
Acquisition and in the Editing.
In this manual the next to the general setup the specific setup for the pipe
detection is discussed.
The manual explains how the pie detection works in the Acquisition and
Editing by modifying the pipe detection parameters.
The final result is a pipe route file that can be generated in the Acquisition
and Editing.
For more information see the file Pipe Detection.pdf.
2.2.19 Pipe Position Monitor

The ‘Pipe Position Monitor’ application in the PDS2000 software is
designed for pipe monitoring onboard pipe lay vessels of Allseas only.
For the pipe monitoring 2 RESON SeaBat 6012 systems are used which
are mounted on the stinger to look upwards to the pipe. They are
mounted underneath the outgoing pipe and measure the actual pipe
position relative to the bottom of the stinger.
The manual will guide the user through all the aspects of PDS2000 which
are used for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor’.
For more information see the file Pipe Position Monitor.pdf.

2.2.20 Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay
The ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’ application in the PDS2000 software is
designed for pipe monitoring onboard the Balder of Heerema Marine
Contractors.
For the pipe monitoring 2 RESON SeaBat 8125 systems will be used
which are mounted on the side near the J-Lay tower looking sideward to
the pipe.
The manual will guide the user through all the aspects of PDS2000 which
are used for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’.
For more information see the file Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay.pdf.
2.2.21 Rope Excavator

The application type ‘Rope Excavator’ is for a project where a rope
excavator is used for dredging.
A project with the application type ‘Rope Excavator’ can contain one or
two vessels. For a one vessel project the vessel is the rope excavator and
for a two vessels project the vessels are the rope excavator and a
pontoon on which the rope excavator is located.
In this application manual the setup of a rope excavator project for a
stand-alone rope excavator and for a rope excavator on a pontoon will be
discussed. After the project is setup the separate tools of the rope
excavator configuration have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the
boom and the rope will be explained.
At the end the views in the Acquisition will be discussed and an answer to
the frequent ask questions about PDS2000 in a rope excavator
application will be given.
For more information see the file Rope Excavator.pdf.
2.2.22 Slope Protection

PDS2000 is used to position a crane barge equipped with a grab crane
and a special construction attached to the barge, which can be lowered
on a slope for the laying of a fabric cover. The construction has a roller
bar at the end that is used to keep the fabric cover at its place on the
slope. The grab crane places rock on the fabric cover just in front of the
roller bar.
PDS2000 displays both the position of the crane and the fabric cover
laying equipment. A grid model is updated each time rock is placed on the
fabric cover.
For more information see the file Slope Protection.pdf.
2.2.23 Sonar Swath

The Sonar Swath utility is made to analyze processed bathymetry data
and generate a report of sonar performance as a function of the beam
launch angle or the beam distance from the center.
The algorithm used in Sonar Swath compares independent pairs of depth
measurements along-track, at the same launch angle. Standard
deviations are calculated by beam angle or beam distance and the results
are displayed in a histogram.
For more information see the file Sonar Swath.pdf.

2.2.24 Tide Application
Tide affects the measured height (Z) of the vessel reference point. The
measured heights are brought back (reduced) to a mean level (Chart
Datum, sometimes-called MSL) by applying tide corrections to the
measured reference point height.
For more information see the file Tide Application.pdf.
2.2.25 Trailing Suction Hopper

The application type ‘Trailing Suction Hopper’ is for a project where a
suction hopper is used for dredging.
In this application manual the setup of a trailing suction hopper project will
be discussed. After the project is setup the separate tools of the trailing
suction hopper configuration have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the
upper pipe and lower pipe will be explained.
At the end the Acquisition and the most used views in the Acquisition will
be discussed.
For more information see the file Trailing Suction Hopper.pdf.
2.2.26 Trencher
In PDS2000 the application ‘Trencher’ is made for the support of a cable
trencher. The cable will be trenched with a cable trencher and in this
application the knife depth will be calculated to determine the burial depth
of the cable.
In PDS2000 two vessels have to be setup, one is the survey vessel and
one is the trencher. The trencher will be positioned by a USBL positioning
system.
In this document will be explained which equipment on the trencher and
on the survey vessel, next to the standard equipment, have to be
selected. After the setup the calibration will be explained and some views
in the Acquisition will be discussed.
For more information see the file Trencher.pdf.
2.2.27 USBL
In this manual the USBL (Ultra Short BaseLine) as used in PDS2000 will
be explained.
The USBL equipment has to be setup in the Equipment list of PDS2000.
A USBL transceiver device and a USBL transponder device has to be
selected and setup.
Before a USBL survey can be started, a USBL calibration has to be done
to find the misalignment of the USBL transceiver. In this manual the
procedure for the USBL calibration will be explained.
For more information see the file USBL.pdf.

3 Installation
3.1 Introduction
This part of the manual describes the minimum requirements, how to
install PDS2000, C-Map charts and Tresco charts on a computer and how
to configure the computer for optimum use with PDS2000.
3.1.1 Requirements
The supported operating systems are for 32 bit and 64 bit:
 MS Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or higher
 MS Windows Vista
 MS Windows 7
The system requirements for a desktop and laptop system are:
Minimal requirements:
 CPU: modern Quad Core Processor
 Monitor: single monitor system
 Graphic card with OPENGL support and 1 Gb of memory; i.e.
NVidia Geforce GTX 4xx
 4 Gb internal memory
 1 x 500 Gb Hard disk
 DVD Writer
 Multi serial I/O card
Preferred requirements:
 CPU: 8 Core Processor
 Monitor: dual monitor system
 Dual Graphic card with OPENGL support and 3+ Gb of memory,
i.e. NVidia GeForce GTX 6xx or ATI Radion HD 79xx
Having a 32 bit operating
system limits the amount of  8 Gb internal memory
usable internal memory to
 Raid 0 Hard disk system for data storage: 1 Tb minimum
4 Gb.
 DVD Writer
 Multi serial I/O card
The requirements for the PC are depending on the application. A single-
 beam application requires less computer power then a multibeam

application. Between these two applications a lot of other applications or
combinations are possible.
PDS2000 - User Manual Installation  11

3.1.2 Memory Improvement
For some applications in the PDS2000 the Large Address Aware is
enabled. As result of this the applications Editing, Backscatter
Processing, Grid Model Editor, LiteView and Plot can use more than 2 Gb
of memory on 32 bit platforms when the operating system boot.ini file is
adjusted.
 For Windows 7 platforms the following line has to be executed in
the command prompt with the proper user rights to increase the
applications maximum memory to 3072 Mb:
bcdedit /set IncreaseUserVa 3072
See also http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/windows/hardware/ff542202(v=vs.85).aspx
 For Windows XP platforms the boot.ini has to be adjusted as
follows:
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS=
"Microsoft Windows XP Professional 3GB" /3GB /fastdetect
See also http://support.microsoft.com/kb/289022
The crucial part is to add the /3GB option. It might be that your MS
Windows boot.ini file looks a bit different.
 Do this only once! It will be remembered by Windows the next time the
system is started.
When these steps are not performed the application can only use the
default maximum memory. So it is not necessary to apply these changes
but when done you get more memory for the applications.
The modification is only needed for 32 bit Windows operating systems. 64
 Bit Windows operating systems don’t need to be modified. They already
are able to give the applications memory allocation bigger than 2 Gb.
3.2 Install PDS2000

The PDS2000 software is distributed on a CD-Rom. This CD is written
according the ISO-9660 standard and can be read from nearly all CD-
Rom stations.
A new version of PDS2000 is always available on the ftp-site of RESON.
 The address is ftp.reson.nl with user name ‘pds2000’ and password

‘getlatestversion’. See also the Help menu of the Control Center on page
164.
3.2.1 Start PDS2000 Installation

If the option ‘Autorun for CD-Rom’ is selected in the operating system the
CD will start automatically when it is inserted and the welcome page of
the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard will appear.
In case the CD does not start automatically, follow these steps:
a. Select in Windows Explorer the CD and select the file ‘setup.exe’ to
start the installation of PDS2000. The welcome page of the PDS2000
InstallShield Wizard will appear. Click on to continue.
12  Installation PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 3-1 Welcome page of the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard
b. Before the actual installation will start the user has to select the type of
setup.
Figure 3-2 Type of setup in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard
 Client Control Center. A stripped Control Center made for Boraciet.

See for detailed information the Boraciet manual, ‘Boraciet.pdf’.
 Full. The full version of PDS2000 will be installed.
 Remote Presentation via Cable. For an installation on computers
that are connected through a network cable with the main
PDS2000 computer (see page 22).
 Remote Presentation via WiFi.For an installation on computers that
are connected through a WiFi network with the main PDS2000
computer (see page 22).
After the selection of the setup type click on to continue.

c. The next page asks for a destination to install the program. The default
directory is ‘C:\Program Files\RESON\PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x’, where
x.x.x.x is the version number. With the option any directory
name can be selected. Click on to continue.
d. A window will pop up in which the ACL installer will make the
PDS2000 Project folder accessible for each user.
ACL also makes for MS Windows 7 the folder ‘C:\Program
Data\RESON\PDS2000’ and for MS Windows XP the folder
‘C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\RESON\PDS2000’ accessible.
e. If already an older PDS2000 version is/was installed with not the latest
C-Map software, then an Update C-Map SDK dialog will appear.
Figure 3-3 Update C-Map SDK software
From this new PDS2000 version onwards PDS2000 will only run with
the new version of the C-Map software. Click on to start with
the installation of the new C-Map software. If the user clicks on
no C-Map software will be installed and PDS2000 will not run
with C-Map anymore. Only when the user install later on the new C-
Map software PDS2000 will run again with C-Map.
See the chapter ‘Installing and Using C-Map’ on page 24 for a detailed
explanation of the C-Map installation.
f. Click on in the next page of the install wizard to start the
PDS2000 installation. Click on to finish the installation.
Installing PDS2000 will place the PDS2000 and the Dongle software
on the hard disk of the computer.
g. Click on on the desktop to start PDS2000.

3.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS2000
Figure 3-4 Repair or Remove PDS2000 in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard
After PDS2000 is installed and the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard is

started again, a faulty installation of PDS2000 can be repaired or the
installed PDS2000 version can be removed from the system.
3.2.3 File Structure

After the installation is finished, in several folders on the hard disk
PDS2000 files are created.
The PDS2000 program is placed in the folder ‘C:\Program Files\RESON’
with the following folders:
Figure 3-5 File structure of PDS2000
PDS2000 V.x.x.x.x
Where x.x.x.x is the installed version number. This folder contains the
programs and supporting files to run PDS2000.
General
Contains device drivers and more supporting files.
GeoidModels
Contains the files with the geoid models (see page 79) and X, Y

and Z post corrections (see page 79) which are used in some
coordinate systems of the predefined database.
Northarrows
Contains DXF files which are used for the North Arrow in Plot (see
page 559).
Obsolete
Contains device drivers which are replaced by more general or
improved drivers in the equipment list. If these obsolete drivers are
already selected in a project then they can still be used in that
project. The obsolete drivers cannot be selected anymore in the
equipment list and the replaced drivers have to be used (see the
release notes for an updated list of the obsolete drivers).
ReportDefinitions
Contains the definitions for all the different types of reports
PDS2000 can generate.
Symbols
Contains the symbols which are used in the User Maps (see page
355).
HTML Help
Contains the online HTML Help files which can be activated with the
F1 key or with Help > Help Topics in the menu bar.
localizations
Contains the translations of PDS2000. At the moment next to the
English version a Dutch, an Italian, a German, a French, a Russian
and a Chinese version is available. For more information see the
chapter ‘Control - Language’ on page 203.
manuals
Contains next to this manual several other manuals in PDF format.
Release Notes
Contains the release notes of this PDS2000 version.
System Requirements
Contains the system requirement for PDS2000.
Team Viewer
Contains the RESON Support file to start Team Viewer setup specific
for RESON users. With Team Viewer the RESON support team can
then take over the system to assist the user.
During the installation a project folder called ‘PDS2000 Projects’ is
created. For MS Windows XP this folder is located in ‘C:\Documents and
 Settings\All Users\Shared Documents’ and for MS Windows Vista and MS

Windows 7 in ‘C:\Users\Public\Public Documents’. If the user wants a
different location for the project folder, he can create his own folder before
PDS2000 is started.
In the project folder a general folder called ‘Projects Common Files’ is
 created. Common vessel settings will be stored in this folder (see
pagexxx).

For MS Windows XP the setting files of PDS2000 are placed in ‘C:\
Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\RESON\PDS2000’
and for MS Windows Vista and MS Windows 7 in
 ‘C:\ProgramData\RESON\PDS2000’. These files contain information that
can be used over different projects. Also when a new PDS2000 version is
installed these files will not be overwritten, so the old settings can be used
in the new PDS2000 version.
3.3 Adapting Hardware

Sometimes it is necessary to make hardware changes in the computer to
run PDS2000.
 Install a network card (see below).
 Install one or more serial extenders (see page 17).
 Optionally, connect multiple monitors (see page 19).
 Place the dongle on a parallel port or USB port (optional) (see page
19).
3.3.1 Network Card

PDS2000 uses network protocols to transfer data internally between the
various sections. In case the computer has a network installed and
configured, no further adjustments are required.
However is the computer a standalone machine then the installation of a
network card and adding TCP/IP protocols is required. Configuring
TCP/IP is necessary in case sensors use network interfaces.
3.3.2 Serial Extender Cards

Most of the supported sensors use serial connections to transfer data.
Modern computers have one or two serial ports only. To have the
possibility to use more sensors the installation of a serial extender is
necessary. In principle, any card supported by the operating system is
acceptable; however RESON B.V. prefers to use PCI cards of the brand
Moxa. The port numbers (COM n:) that Windows assigns to the ports are
also valid for PDS2000.
Three types of serial extenders are available.
1. USB to serial converters.
2. PCI cards. Various brands are available, usually with 4 or 8 serial
ports.
3. PCMCIA cards for laptop/notebook computers.
The use of extender cards requires special drivers.
3.3.2.1 USB to serial converters

These converters can only be used for non-time-critical applications. The
ports are multiplexed/demultiplexed and therefore by nature rather
unstable in timing. It is acceptable to use these converters for
measurements that do not require a strict time control. Use the drivers
supplied by the manufacturer that suit the operating system.

3.3.2.2 Other cards
For the other cards use the drivers supplied by the manufacturer of the
card. If in Windows XP the Moxa card C168H/PCI has to be installed, use
the drivers that are available on the distribution CD-Rom in the directory
‘Moxa’.
Select the option Add Hardware in the ‘Control Panel’ of Windows XP and
select manually a ‘Multi-port serial adapter’.
After the driver is installed for each port, the receive buffers must be set to
the fastest timing:
a. Select in the ‘Control Panel’ the option System and the System
Properties window will be opened. Select in this window the tab
Hardware, click on to open the Device Manager
window and look for the ‘Multi-port serial adapters’.
Figure 3-6 Device Manager window with the Moxa extender card
b. Double click on the card to get the card properties.

c. Select in the tab Port Configuration one of the ports and click on
.
Figure 3-7 Port settings for a COM port
d. Set the Rx FIFO Trigger to 1. Check the option Set the change to all
the ports and click on .
This sets the timing for all ports to optimal, giving the shortest possible
delays.

3.3.3 Monitors
This is not a specific PDS2000 feature. All Windows versions support
It is recommended to multiple monitors. This can be achieved by a dedicated graphics card with
install the drivers which are
more outputs or with additional adapter cards in the computer. When
supplied with the graphic
card multiple monitors are installed on the PC, PDS2000 can use them. It is
required that the graphics card has full support for Open GL.
3.4 PDS2000 Dongle

PDS2000 is protected with a dongle or a key. The dongle software is
loaded during the installation of the PDS2000 software. A dongle is
supplied with each PDS2000 license and contains the purchased options.
When an USB key is used, Windows will detect the key and extra
software to use the USB key on that USB port has to be installed.
Figure 3-8 Welcome page of the Found New Hardware Wizard
Select in window Found New Hardware Wizard dialog the option Yes, this
time only and click on to continue with the wizard.
Figure 3-9 Install page of the Found New Hardware Wizard

Select the option Install the software automatically (Recommended) and
click on to start the installation for the USB port. Click after the
installation on to finish the wizard. If the USB key is placed on a
different USB port then the extra software for the dongle has to be
installed again.
During startup, PDS2000 looks for the dongle or key on all parallel or
USB ports until it is found. Thereafter that port is checked at intervals. Is
the dongle or key not present at startup or removed during working, then
PDS2000 falls into a simulation mode. This means logging of data and
saving or printing is not possible.
3.4.1 Update of PDS2000 Dongle

Each PDS2000 dongle is related to a maintenance contract. When this
maintenance contract ends an update of the dongle is necessary. If the
dongle is not updated it is not possible to use newer PDS2000 versions.
To update the dongle a patch has to be loaded with the latest information
for the dongle. This patch can be available with the latest PDS2000
release or is sent to the user as a separate file. The update procedure is
for both patches identical.
Select in the Control Center the menu option Help > About Control Center
to open the About Control Center window.
Figure 3-10 The About Control Center window where the PDS2000 dongle
can be updated
At the bottom of this window the dongle information is available. Click on

to start the update of the dongle. An information window will
be opened where the dongle settings are displayed.

Figure 3-11 Dongle Update information window
Click on to start the file selection for the dongle update.
Figure 3-12 The All Dongles.dk4 file
When the dongle update is available with the latest PDS2000 installation
select the ‘All Dongles.dk4’ file. This file contains the dates for all
PDS2000 released dongles as maintained by RESON.

Figure 3-13 The separate patch for the dongle update
When the user has received a separate patch for his dongle then browse
to the correct folder and select the dk4 file as received from RESON.
Click on to start the update of the dongle. When the update is
not successful contact your local agent or RESON B.V. and inform them
on the internal ID and the dongle s/n.
3.5 Installing a Remote Presentation

A remote presentation can be run on any computer provided it is
connected to the main PDS2000 computer over a network.
For the installation of a remote presentation the same procedure as for
the installation of PDS2000 (see page 12) has to be followed. Select in
the page where the type of setup has to be selected the option Remote
Presentation via Cable or Remote Presentation via WiFi (see Figure 3-2
on page 13).
When the option via Cable is selected the installation copies some files to
the PDS2000 folder, makes some system changes and a remote
presentation icon ( ) will be placed on the desktop. These changes will
ensure that the remote presentation program runs at startup.
When the option via WiFi is selected the installation installs a full
PDS2000 and a remote presentation icon will be placed on the desktop.
 The Remote Presentation should have the same version number as the
PDS2000 version on the main computer!!
If a new driver is added to PDS2000 then when as remote presentation

 via WiFi is used this new driver has to be added to the PDS2000 and to
the remote presentation.
If PDS2000 is already installed on the remote computer then starts up the
file ‘RemotePresentation.exe’ from the PDS2000 folder.

 1. On the main PDS2000 computer the PDS2000 program folder in the
directory ‘C:\Program Files\RESON’ and the project folder have to be
shared with the remote computer. Also the folder PDS2000 in the
 directory ‘C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\RESON’ (MS Windows XP) or ‘C:\Program Data\RESON’ (MS
Windows 7) has to be shared with the remote computer.
If it is not possible to share one of the folders try to share the folder
one or two levels higher.
2. If both computers are in a network and are only accessible with a user
name and a password, then the authorization to read data on the
PDS2000 computer has to be set. Use Windows Explorer on the
remote computer to logon to the data on the PDS2000 computer.
 If this is not done an error message (error 0) will appear when the
remote presentation is started.
3. On the main PDS2000 computer the Control Center should be running
before the remote presentation can be started. Select from the list the
main PDS2000 computer when the remote presentation is started for
the first time. The remote presentation program tries to find the Control
Center and when successful, minimizes itself into the right side of the
taskbar with a green ‘connect’ icon . Double click on the icon will
open the Remote Presentation window.
Figure 3-14 Remote Presentation window with PDS-Develop-5 as the main

computer
As long as the Control Center on the main PDS2000 computer is not

running, the connection icon on the remote computer is orange or
yellow. As soon as the Control Center is started on the main PDS2000
computer, this icon turns to green. The Connections window in the
Control Center will indicate a connection with the remote computer.
Figure 3-15 Connections window with a connection to the remote PC

(RESON)

3.5.1 Running a Remote Presentation
Before the remote presentation can be running, a presentation has to be
added to the layouts. There are two methods to add a presentation.
1. Open the vessel configuration with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar in the Control Center. Add a
presentation to the layout page of the vessel configuration (see page
67).
2. Add a presentation in the Connections window of the main PDS2000
computer. This is only possible when the Acquisition is running. Open
in the Connections window with a right click the context menu, and
select the option Add Presentation… and the Layout dialog will be
opened to select the remote computer and layout (see page 68).
If a presentation is added to the layouts on the main PDS2000 computer
and the connect icon is green, then when the Acquisition is started
automatically the Presentation will be opened on the remote computer.
3.6 Installing and Using C-Map

C-Map is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
that optionally can be used with PDS2000. When C-Map is installed it can
be used as a layer in different views of PDS2000.
To get C-Map in your system, the following steps have to be taken.
1. Buy C-Map from RESON B.V or directly from C-Map.
A DVD with C-Map charts in the CM-93 format and an eToken dongle
is supplied.
2. Install the eToken dongle driver and C-Map (see page 24).
3. Install the C-Map charts on your computer.
4. Get a license from the C-Map distributor (see page 29).
The procedure is detailed below.
3.6.1 Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map

The driver for the eToken dongle has to be installed before the C-Map
 software installation is started. When the eToken dongle is installed after

the C-Map installation C-Map does not work!!
If the user has an existing C-Map license which is not expired yet, it is not
 necessary to install the driver for the eToken.
a. Select the folder ‘CMap’ on the CD-Rom of PDS2000, and start the file
‘Setup.exe’.
Figure 3-16 Setup dialog

Insert the eToken dongle and click on to continue with the
installation of the eToken driver (continue with ‘b’), click on if
no eToken driver has to be installed (continue with ‘e’).

It is very important not to install the driver when Windows detects the
eToken driver and wants to install it.
b. If on is clicked in ‘0’ then the next dialog will be the C-Map

Professional SDK Setup.
Figure 3-17 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the eToken
dongle and the C-Map software
Click on to start the installation of the eToken dongle and the

C-Map software. Click on to stop the installation.
c. A dialog will be opened where the user has to select which dongle is
used. With a new dongle, eToken PRO 72k (JAVA), it is possible that
this dialog does not appear, the installation detect then automatically
the right dongle. The type of the dongle can be checked on the dongle
itself.
Figure 3-18 eToken dongle selection
The eToken PRO (32k) Select when the old eToken dongle is used, select
does not work on MS when the new dongle is used.
Windows 7 64bits!!!!!
d. It is possible that after the installation of the eToken driver or after
 removing an old eToken driver or C-Map version, the installation ask to

restart the computer. Restart always the computer and the installation
dialog will start again and answer the questions from the beginning to
 continue with the installation. This restart request can appears 1, 2 or

3 times, depends on the Windows settings on the computer and what
have to be installed.

e. If no eToken dongle has to be installed in ‘0’ then the next dialog will
be the C-Map Professional SDK Setup.
Figure 3-19 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the C-Map
software
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map software. Click

on to stop the installation.
f. The welcome page for the C-Map software will appear.
Figure 3-20 Welcome page of the C-Map Professional SDK Runtime Setup
wizard
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map Professional

SDK software.

g. The next page will be the Installation Folder page.
Figure 3-21 Installation folder for the C-Map software
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map software.

h. In the next page of the wizard the user has to confirm the start of the
installation.
Figure 3-22 Confirm the installation of the C-Map software
Click on to confirm the start of the installation.

i. In the next dialog the screen diagonal has to be entered.
Figure 3-23 Calibrate the screen diagonal
The diagonal of the main computer screen used for PDS2000 has to
be set. This will be used to find the best display resolution. Click on
when the diagonal is not known.
Click on after the right screen diagonal is entered.
When the C-Map software is installed on a computer where no C-Map
software was installed before then the next dialog will be ‘l‘.
j. When old C-Map software with a license was active before the new
software is installed then the next dialog will ask what to do with the
license.
Figure 3-24 C-Map user setup dialog
Click on to keep the active license and no new license has to

be activated. Go to ‘m’ for the next dialog.
Click on when a new license has to be activated, the old one
will be remove.
When the license is for an old eToken dongle and now a new eToken
 dongle is used then click always on . The new eToken dongle
does not work with the license for the old eToken dongle.
k. This dialog will be opened when in ‘j’ on is clicked.
Figure 3-25 Confirmation to remove licenses

Click on when the licenses have to be removed and click on
to keep the existing license(s). After both selection, the next
dialog is ‘m’.
l. The last page of the C-Map installation will only appear when the
software is installed for the first time on the computer.
Figure 3-26 Last page of the C-Map installation wizard
Click on to close the installation wizard.

m. As confirmation of the installation the next dialog will show what is
installed.
Figure 3-27 eToken dongle driver and C-Map software is installed
When only the C-Map software has to be installed, as displayed in ‘e’,

then this dialog will show only the C-Map software.
Click on to close the complete installation.
3.6.2 Applying for a C-Map License

A chart database can also To be able to display a C-Map chart database in full precision, a license
be one or more imported from C-Map is necessary and RESON B.V. will assist where required.
S-57 charts. The charts
should be in one folder, so A C-Map license is only valid for one eToken dongle. C-Map can be
C-Map can see the folder installed on more computers but only the computer with the eToken
as a database. dongle, for which the license is installed, will give a full precision of C-
Map.
By default the location for the C-Map software is ‘C:\Program Files\C-Map
Professional SDK Runtime’.

In the Explorer of a. Use ‘Windows Explorer’ to locate the file 'ChartManager.exe' in the
PDS2000 the C-Map Chart folder ‘System’ of the C-Map directory and double click on the file to
Manager can be opened in run the application.
the PDS2000 Database It is also possible to open the C-Map Chart Manager through the start
(see page 215). menu; All Programs > C-Map Professional SDK Runtime > C-Map
Chart Manager.
Figure 3-28 C-Map Chart Manager with the Databases page
 The users who are only using the S-57 converted charts in C-Map can
skip the items b – h and continue with item i on page 33.
b. If the database Professional+ is not present in the list of registered

databases click on and browse to the (DVD) location
and click on to copy the database to the PC. When this is
finished a message appears that the database registration was
successful.
Figure 3-29 Database registration is successful

c. If the database is registered then it will be displayed in the list of
registered databases.
Figure 3-30 C-Map Chart Manager with the registered database
d. Select the database Professional+ and click on to set

the database as the default database for C-Map.
Figure 3-31 C-Map Chart Manager with the Professional+ database set as
default

e. Before C-Map can be used the license information has to be obtained
from C-Map. Open in the C-Map Chart Manager the System Info page.
Figure 3-32 System Info page of the C-Map Chart Manager
The eToken dongle number will be displayed as the System ID and

click on to export a user file with the information
about the dongle.
f. Send an E-mail to RESON B.V. (Sales@reson.nl) or to C-Map with the
user file as attachment.
Make sure to include the following information in the e-mail:
- The full company name and e-mail return details.
- Reason (Purchase or Subscription).
g. RESON B.V. will process the information and get the license
information from C-Map or C-Map will send the information directly.
h. The user will receive a return e-mail with an attachment called
‘password.usr’ with the following information.
Example for an eToken PRO (32k):
[Reson eT 30021]
CD-ROM ID=Professional+.449
Expired=04.2011
Zone 1, Area13=C7906FE45FBACBAE
Example for an eToken PRO 72k (JAVA) dongle:
[JeT Reson 00001]
CD-ROM ID=Professional+.449
Expired=04.2011
Zone 1, Area13=C7906FE45FBACBAE
Example for S-57 to C-Map conversion:
[JeT Reson 00001]
CD-ROM ID=Software Modules.1
Expired=7.2011
CM933CMP=F695465EF659F83A
V3CATMGR=BFC33C0FB0825A52

i. On receipt of the email, open the C-Map Chart Manager application
once more and select the Licenses page.
Figure 3-33 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager
To use C-Map with the Select the right database at the top and choose one of the license
same eToken dongle on a actions.
different computer the
same license information Click on when the user wants to read the usr file with
has to be activated again. the license information. Select the file and click on in the
‘Select a license file’ dialog to read the license code(s) from the file.
For clients who are only using the converted S-57 files select as
 database ‘Software Modules’ and use always
this database does not have a Zone defined in the usr file.
because
Click on when the user wants to enter the license

code(s) manually. An ‘Add License Manually’ window will be opened.
Figure 3-34 Add License Manually window to add the license code(s)
Select the right zone with the right area and enter the license code as
given in the email or from the usr file. Click on to activate
the license for the selected zone. Repeat this for each zone and/or
area that needs a license.

j. After the licenses are activated, in the Licenses page of the C-Map
Chart Manager the selected zone(s) and area(s) are displayed with an
expiry date.
Figure 3-35 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager with a license for
a zone.
k. C-Map with the right database is now installed and can be used in the
views of PDS2000.
3.6.3 Updating C-Map Database

The C-Map Chart Manager For updating the C-Map database the C-Map Chart Manager has to be
can also be opened in the opened again.
Explorer (see page 215).
Figure 3-36 C-Map Chart Manager
a. Place the new DVD with the database in the DVD drive and click on
.

b. When the copying is finished a message appears that the database is
updated.
Figure 3-37 Database is updated
c. In the C-Map Chart Manager the database is updated.
Figure 3-38 Professional+ database is updated
d. Also the license is updated for the new database.
Figure 3-39 License is updated for new database

3.6.4 Using the C-Map Layer in PDS2000
The new C-Map software will also work with PDS2000 versions before
 3.3.0.0. But before it will work in one of these ‘old’ versions, the file
‘CMGBase.dll’ located in the ‘PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x’ folder of the ‘old’ version
has to be deleted.
In some dedicated plan views in PDS2000, C-Map can be viewed as a
layer. Click on in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context
menu to get the Layers window.
Figure 3-40 Layers window with a C-Map layer
If there is no C-Map layer in the Layers window, click on and

select from the Add Layer dialog the C-Map layer. Automatically the
properties of the C-Map layer will be opened.
If the C-Map layer is already added to the Layers window, click on
to open the properties of the existing C-Map layer.
Figure 3-41 C-Map Layer Properties

Symbolization
There are three options:
S52 is the international standard for drawing a chart, and describes the
way chart items are drawn. The difference between the traditional and
the simplified mode is the way chart colors are used.
C-Map has its own standard for charting and does not show some
navigational areas (such as danger area or anchor area).
Scale Level
Controls the detail of the C-Map chart in the view. When scale level is
set to Automatic, the scaling is controlled by the current zoom factor of
the view. Other options are fixed modes, from coarse to fine, which are
mentioned in the table below:
Chart Scale Chart
Scale Level Accuracy
From To (m)
Z – Background (small) 1:50,000,000 1:5,000,001 15,000.00
A – Background (medium) 1:5,000,000 1:500,001 1,500.00
B – Overview 1:1,500,000 1:500,001 450.00
C – General 1:500,000 1:150,001 150.00
D – Coastal 1:150,000 1:50,001 45.00
E – Approach 1:50,000 1:15,001 15.00
F – Harbor 1:15,000 1:5,001 4.50
G – Berthing 1:5,000 1:1,501 1.50
C-Map charts are digitized with a precision of 0.3 mm. This results in
chart accuracy on the display, which is given in the table above for the
largest scale of each scale level.
Display Detail
For the details of the C-Map chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the C-Map
chart.
Show Light Info
The light information can be switched on or off.
Show Generic Text
The names of ports and areas can be switched on or off.
Show Other Text
Additional text such as names of features can be switched on or off.
Anti Cluttering
Switch override suppression (C-Map's anti-cluttering engine) on or off.
Show Chart Boundaries
The red chart boundaries in the display can be switched on or off.
Use C-Map Filters
C-Map filters are not user definable. Contact RESON B.V. in case
special requirements for C-Map filters are needed. This function
enables or disables the filters.
C-Map Filter Name
At the moment three filters are available:
- No Buoys
- No Buoys and Beacons
- No Buoys, Beacons and Piles
These filters remove the filtered items from the chart.

3.7 Installing and Using Tresco
Tresco is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
that optionally can be used with PDS2000. When Tresco is installed it can
be used as a layer in different views of PDS2000. The charts can be
displayed as background with the Tresco S-52 presentation library.
To get Tresco in your system, the following steps have to be taken.
1. Buy Tresco from RESON B.V.
A DVD with Tresco charts and Navigis software is supplied. Also a
Sentinel dongle is needed to open Tresco charts in PDS2000.
2. Install the DVD; the Tresco charts, the Navigis software and the
Sentinel dongle driver will be installed.
3. Run the extra file ‘SetupTrescoKernel.exe’ to get Tresco charts
working with PDS2000.
The procedure is detailed below.
3.7.1 Install Tresco Charts and Dongle Driver

The Navigis software is normally used to display the Tresco charts. The
setup from the Navigis software now be used to display the Tresco charts
in PDS2000.
a. Place the Tresco DVD in the DVD drive and run the file ‘setup.exe’.
Figure 3-42 Select language for the installation
Select the language and click on to start the installation.

b. The welcome page for the Navigis software will appear.
Figure 3-43 Welcome page of the Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard

Click on to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.
c. The next page will be the Select Destination Location page.
Figure 3-44 The installation folder for the Navigis software
Click on to continue with the installation.

d. On the next page some additional tasks can be selected which will be
performed during the installation.
Figure 3-45 Additional tasks
The option ‘Install Sentinel driver’ should be selected when the Tresco
charts are installed for the first time and no Sentinel driver is installed
yet.
The other three options are not needed for a proper installation of the
Navigis software.
Click on to continue.

e. The next page is to start the installation of the Navigis software.
Figure 3-46 Ready to install the software
Click on to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software

and the additional tasks, click on to go back to check the
settings.
f. This will be next page of the installation wizard.
Figure 3-47 The installation of the software
When the installation is finished the following window will be displayed.

Figure 3-48 The Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard is finished
Click on to finish the installation.
 g. When the installation is finished the Sentinel dongle can be inserted

and the device driver for the dongle will be installed.
3.7.2 Run SetupTrescoKernel.exe

At this stage the Tresco charts are not working in PDS2000. An extra
setup file has to be run to set all the settings so PDS2000 has access to
the Tresco charts.
Select the folder ‘Tresco’ on the CD-Rom of PDS2000 and start the file
‘SetupTrescoKernel.exe’.
a. When the file is started the first page will be the welcome page of the
wizard.
Figure 3-49 Welcome page of the Tresco Kernel Setup Wizard
Click on to continue with the setup.

b. The next page is the Select Destination Location page for the kernel.
Figure 3-50 Installation folder of the kernel
 The selected folder should be identical with the folder that is selected
for the Navigis software in Figure 3-44 on page 39.
Click on to continue with the installation.
Figure 3-51 Folder exist
This will be displayed when the same folder is selected. Click on

to continue. This setup will overwrite some existing files in
the selected folder.

c. In the next page the Sentinel driver can be selected to install as
additional task.
Figure 3-52 Additional task
Don’t select the option ‘Install Sentinel driver’ because the driver is
already installed during the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.
Click on to continue with the setup.
d. In the next page the installation of the kernel can be started.
Figure 3-53 Ready to install the kernel
Click on to start the installation of the kernel, click on

to go back to check the settings.

e. During the installation of the kernel a screen width has to be entered.
Figure 3-54 Screen width
The Tresco kernel needs to know the width of the screen to calculate
the scale to display the charts in the correct scale on the screen.
Click on after the right screen width is entered and the
installation will be finished. Click on to finish the installation of
the kernel.
When no detailed information on the Tresco chart is displayed it is
possible that the file TE.PMT, which has to be used in conjunction with
 the dongle, is not installed on the right location. Check if the file is present
on the DVD, if not contact RESON BV or Tresco about this problem. If the
file is present copy the file to the folder ‘C:\Navichart\S57’.
3.7.3 Using the Tresco Layer in PDS2000

In some dedicated plan views in PDS2000, Tresco charts can be viewed
as a layer. Click on in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context
menu to get the Layers window.
Figure 3-55 Layers window with a Tresco layer
If there is no Tresco layer in the Layers window, click on and

select from the Add Layer dialog the Tresco layer. Automatically the
properties of the Tresco layer will be opened.
If the Tresco layer is already added to the Layers window, click on
to open the properties of the existing Tresco layer.

Figure 3-56 Tresco Layer Properties
Display Detail
For the details of the Tresco chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the Tresco
chart.
Show Geographic Names
The geographic names can be switched on or off.
Show Names For Position Reporting
The labels for the position reporting can be switched on or off.
Show Buoys and Beacons
The buoys and beacons can be switched on or off. The light for the
buoys and beacons can be switched on or off with the option ’Show
Lights’.
Show Lights
The light and the labels can be switched on or off.
Show Light Descriptions
The labels for the lights can be switched on or off.
This option will only work when the option ‘Show Lights’ is on.
Show Full Length Sector Lights
The full length for some of the sector lights can be switched on or
off. Most of the lights don’t have a full length option.
This option will only work when the option ‘Show Lights’ is on.
Text Resolution
The size of the text on the charts can be defined in dpi.
Symbol Resolution
The size of the symbols on the charts can be defined in dpi.

4 Using PDS2000
4.1 Introduction
PDS2000 is designed with a Windows ‘Look and Feel’. On top of that
PDS2000 has some additional features.
Double click on ‘PDS2000 Control Center’ on the desktop to open the

Control Center of PDS2000. From the Control Center every module of
PDS2000 can be started. See for a detailed explanation of the Control
Center the chapter ‘Control Center’ on page 163.
Before the Control Center of PDS2000 is started PDS2000 will do a check
 on the Operating System running on the computer. When the OS is

Windows XP SP2 or lower the Control Center will not be started. A
message will appear on the screen.
With the options Tools > Customize… in the menu bar of the Control
Center the layout of the toolbar can be changed and shortcut keys can be
defined for several macros (see page 262).
Each module has its own menu bar, one or more toolbars and a status
bar. In each module it is possible to select a number of windows that
show the processes of the module. In PDS2000 these windows are called
views.
PDS2000 - User Manual Using PDS2000  47

4.2 Docking
Figure 4-1 Docking
A fixed location for a view is often desirable. A possibility to lock views on

a fixed location in a window is called ‘docking’.
A dedicated button is located on the title bar of each view. Clicking on
this button fixes the view in one of the docking areas. Clicking on the
button once more undocks the view again.
Another way to dock a view is giving a right click on the title bar of the
view and a context menu will appear with a number of choices.
Figure 4-2 Docking context menu
Docked
The view is fixed in one of the dock areas (see below).
Floating
The view is docked but movable. Floating views can be located
outside the window.
MDI Child
‘Multiple Document Interface’ child. The view behaves like any other
view in a Windows application.
Docked to
When pressed, the choice is given to dock a view to any of the four
dock areas (see below).
48  Using PDS2000 PDS2000 - User Manual

MDI Child as
Minimized, Maximized or Restored.
Dragging with the Ctrl-key All the type of views can be moved and resized by dragging the borders.
makes a docked view One click on the title bar brings a floating view back to the previous dock
floating. location.
4.2.1 Dock Areas
Figure 4-3 Dock areas
As shown above, the client area has four dock areas: top, bottom, left and
right. Each dock area can have multiple views.
4.3 Context Menus

Right click in a view or in a specific view area opens a context menu.
Nearly every view in PDS2000 has one. The context menus can be used
to add displays (views), to start a command or to zoom in/out in the view.
There are two types of context menus available in PDS2000, one for the
modules and one for the views. The context menu for the modules is to
add, (de)select or remove views in that module.
Figure 4-4 Context menu in the Acquisition
With the option Displays the Displays window can be opened in which
views can be added, modified or removed from the module. The option
Add Display is a quick method to add a new view to the module. Check
one of the existing views and this view will appear in the module. When a

view is unchecked this view is still available for the module but will not be
displayed in the module.
The context for the views contains commands for the view. Most of these
commands are also available through the toolbar of the view.
Figure 4-5 Context menu of a Plan View
4.4 Navigation in a 3D View

In the Acquisition, Editing and Grid Model Editor several types of 3D
Views can be opened. Because a 3D View has three dimensions, which
are shown on a two-dimensional screen, a special way to navigate in the
view is created.
4.4.1 Rotate the Data

In some editors, the left The center of the rotation is always the center of the view.
mouse button can be used
for other options, and then With the left mouse button or the mouse wheel pressed and dragging the
only the mouse wheel is mouse around will rotate the data in the view.
left to rotate the view.  Rotate the data clockwise.
Drag the mouse to the left or use the Shift + left arrow keys.
 Rotate the data counter-clockwise.

Drag the mouse to the right or use the Shift + right arrow keys.
 Rotate the bottom of the screen (near the user) upwards.
Drag the mouse to the top of the viewer or use the Shift + up arrow
keys.
 Rotate the top of the screen (far from the user) upwards.
Drag the mouse to the bottom of the viewer or use the Shift + down
arrow keys.
50  Using PDS2000 PDS2000 - User Manual

4.4.2 Shift the Data
With the Shift key + left mouse button or Shift key + mouse wheel pressed
and dragging the mouse will shift (pan) the data only in a horizontal
direction.
 Shift the data to the left.
Drag the mouse to the left or use the left arrow key.
 Shift the data to the right.
Drag the mouse to the right or use the right arrow key.
 Shift the data away from the user.
Drag the mouse to the top of the viewer or use the up arrow key.
 Shift the data towards the user.
Drag the mouse to the bottom of the viewer or use the down arrow
key.
 Shift the data down.
Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the Shift + ‘numerical –’ keys.
 Shift the data up.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the Shift + ‘numerical +’ keys.
4.4.3 Zoom in/out in the Data

With the mouse wheel, the user can zoom in or out in the data.
 Zoom out.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the ‘numerical –’ key.
 Zoom in.
Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the ‘numerical +’ key.
4.4.4 Scale the Data

With the Ctrl key + mouse wheel will modify the scale factor of the Z-axis
of the data.
If the scale factor > 1, the  Increase the scale factor.
color of the vertical axis of Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the Ctrl + ‘numerical +’ keys.
the grid will change to red.
 Decrease the scale factor.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the Ctrl + ‘numerical –‘ keys with a
minimum scale factor of one.
4.4.5 Center the Data

Double click with the left mouse button or the mouse wheel on a location
with data and that location will move to the center of the view. It will not
work on the sea level.

5 Starting PDS2000
5.1 Introduction
The Control Center should From the Control Center every module of PDS2000 can be started. But
always be running while before one of the modules is started a project, an application type and a
PDS2000 is used. configuration have to be created or selected. The Control Center does not
start when no project is available.
5.1.1 Project
A project can be an area to be surveyed, a harbor to be made, a river that
has to be dredged to a navigable depth, etc. It may require the
employment of one or more vessels (survey vessels, dredgers, work
ships, excavators) and each vessel can have a special task in the project.
A project has the information on the method of measuring and all the
information necessary to do the measurements.
PDS2000 stores all the details of a project in one folder.
5.1.2 Application Type

In a project, one or more tasks can be carried out. A task can be a vessel
surveying the seafloor, a dredger dredging a river mouth, etc. Such a task
is called an application type in PDS2000.
The application type determines how PDS2000 behaves.
5.1.3 Configuration
A configuration describes the way an application type is carried out. It
contains the used vessel(s), the layout used for the Acquisition and (if
present) Presentation(s), how events are used and alarms are managed.
Multiple configurations are possible for all application types.
Any object that carries sensors is defined as a vessel in PDS2000. Some
application types can handle multiple vessels, and each vessel can have
multiple sensors. This makes it necessary to have a set-up for each
vessel in an application type. The vessel set-up is called the Vessel
Configuration (see page 91).
PDS2000 - User Manual Starting PDS2000  53

5.2 Project Structure
Each project contains of one or more application types (measuring
methods). Each application type has at least one, but may have multiple
configurations.
By selecting a project in the acquisition bar, followed by selecting a
configured application type, it is possible to choose between
configurations in case more than one was made.
Project 1 Project 2
Application Application Application Application

Type 1 Type x Type 1 Type x
Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration

1.1 x.1 1.1 x.1
Configuration Configuration Configuration

x.2 1.2 x.2
Configuration Configuration
1.n x.n
Figure 5-1 Project structures
There are three different ways to make or adjust a project.

1. Existing projects can be amended and adapted for a new
measurement. The configuration can be changed if necessary. By
selecting Acquisition > Configuration from the menu bar or by clicking
on in the toolbar of the Control Center the configuration is opened.
The project configuration can be accessed by selecting Edit > Project
Configuration from the menu bar or by clicking on in the toolbar in
the Control Center.
2. Open the New Project Wizard with File > New Project… to create a
new project.
When a project is copied
from one system to
3. Existing projects can be copied in the project folder and if necessary
another system the related with the logged data. This method is also usable for copying projects
files in the Projects from an office to another location and vice versa. Copying the projects
Common Files folder has can be done with Windows Explorer. The Control Center needs to be
to be copied manually. restarted before the added projects can be selected.
5.3 Projects Common Files

In the PDS2000 projects directory is a map created called ‘Projects
Common Files’. In this map vessel setups will be stored. If a vessel (or
crane) is used for several projects, most of the time the same setup will
be used.
54  Starting PDS2000 PDS2000 - User Manual

When for the same vessel a new project is created, the common
 information from the vessel will be copied from the ‘Projects Common
Files’ map. The changes made in the vessel configuration will be copied
back the common information in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map.
See also the Project The common information contains the following items:
Common tab in the
Explorer (see page 214).  Geometry information.
 Vessel contours, vessel wireframes and 3D studio models.
 Equipment setup.
 Crane configurations with the calibration results for (rope) excavators.

 Pipe configurations with the calibration results for trailing suction
hoppers; the pipe configurations are stored in the crane configuration
file.
 Draught tables and hopper tables for the trailing suction hoppers.
 Setup of the pages for the Numerics – Standard view in the
Acquisition.
 Import and export configurations.
 Events.
 These common information files are not stored in the project folder
anymore. For existing projects the files are not updated in the project
folder, but are stored in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map. For projects
 created with the PDS2000 3.2.0.0 version or later the files are only
available in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map.
5.4 New Project Wizard

If PDS2000 is started for the first time, there will be no project selected. It
is then possible to start the new project wizard directly after the start up.
Figure 5-2 Select Project window with the option Run the New Project wizard
checked
If there are no projects available in the project folder, then an error

window will come up. Click on in the error window and the Select

Project window will be opened. Check in this window the option Run the
New Project wizard and click on to start the project wizard.
If PDS2000 is already started with an existing project, the New Project
wizard can be started from the menu of the Control Center with File >
New Project…. That action starts the wizard’s first dialog window.
Figure 5-3 Start of the new project wizard
On the first page a choice has to be made, start from scratch with an
empty project or use an existing project as template. When an existing
 project is selected, all relevant files from the existing project are copied
into the new project. The logdata subfolders, grid models, CUBE models,
dtm XML files, logdata file sets and sound velocity profiles files are not
 copied to the new project. The new project can then be checked and
changed with the wizard.
As this is a wizard, each dialog window has that will close the
current page and will open the next one. The last page will have .
It is recommended to step through all pages of the wizard. Click on
to stop the wizard at that page without writing the required files
into the project folder. So it is advisable not to click on but to
finish the wizard even without entering data in the pages. That way a
project is made and data can be entered at a later stage.

5.4.1 Project Configuration
Figure 5-4 Project Configuration window
The Project Configuration With both choices in the previous page, the next page gives the Project
can be modified with Edit > Configuration window. When a project was copied the inputs fields
Project Configuration from contain data from the old project, when an empty project was started
the menu bar or with these fields contain default values.
from the toolbar in the
Control Center. In both cases it is advised to check each possible input and the
corresponding input fields. All possible inputs with their input fields are
detailed below.
5.4.1.1 Description
Figure 5-5 Project description
A project description is not compulsory and for project reference purposes

only. All or one of the lines may be left blank.

5.4.1.2 Units
Figure 5-6 Units dialog
The project and all computations in the project use the selected units.
These units are only for display purposes; PDS2000 has its own internal
units for logging the data.
5.4.1.3 Coordinate System
Figure 5-7 Coordinate System information
Click on to select one of the existing coordinate systems that are

available in the database (see page 72) or click on to open the
coordinate system wizard to create a new coordinate system (see page
73). The button is only available when the coordinate system is

created by the user. The coordinate systems which are already created
by PDS2000 cannot be modified.
5.4.1.4 Formats
Figure 5-8 Formats dialog
The project formats are used to present computation results throughout

the project.
Chart coordinates can be shown in grid or geographical coordinates. The
selection above is for the standard displays.
5.4.1.5 Log Files
Figure 5-9 Log Files settings

Enter for Log directory the required name of the folder that has to be used
as logging directory. The default name is ‘LogData’ and will be a sub-
folder of the project folder. In case a different name and/or path are
wanted, enter the name (with the complete path) of the desired folder.
The folder will be created by PDS2000 on the given location.
To activate the backup Check the option Use backup log directory when the user wants a copy of
logging for the logdata and the logdata files and / or the S7K files. The backup log file is made
S7K files check the option simultaneous with the standard logging, so the file size increases during
Enable Backup log in the logging. Click on to select or change the log directory for
Logging page for these file
the backup. The directory will be displayed in the box.
formats (see page 118 and
page 122). For the log file names the user can choose how the log files are called.
The first option, Automatic log file names, is the default option with the
standard PDS2000 log file names (see example in the dialog).
The second option, User defined log file names, is the option where the
user can create a log file name with some standard items and/or with a
user text. The different items that can be selected for the log file name are
 Vessel name
The name of the vessel configuration in the Vessels page of the
Configuration (see page 66). The vessel name cannot be unchecked
and will be always in the log file name.
 Survey type
This is the name of the application type that is selected for the project
(see page 64).
 Run line name
The name of the active runline file as selected in the Runline tab of the
Guidance page (see page 138).
 Start date
The date when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
When no start time is  Start time
selected, a sequence The time when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
number will be used to
differentiate the different  User text
log files. Text that can be added to the log file name. Enter behind the option
User text: the text that has to be added to the log file name.
Check the items that have to be in the log file name. The order of the
items in the log file name can be changed by using or .
Select the item that has to be moved and use one of the buttons to move
the item upwards or downwards.
Between the different items in the log file name a separator is needed.
Selected for the option Separator the right separator (- _ . ,).
At the bottom the option Replace all dots in the log file name will replace
the dots with a dash (or an underscore when a dash is selected as
separator. This means that all the dots, also in the name of the runline,
will be replaced.
With the log file name will be reset to the default log file setting.
In the Acquisition it is possible to change the name of the log file name. If
 the option is active in the Acquisition and a new logdata file is created the
user can specify a different log file name (see page 257).

5.4.1.6 File History
Figure 5-10 Selected file types for a backup
Historical data can be stored in the ‘Backup’ folder in the project. For all
the file types that are checked in the list a copy is made when a new
logging file is opened. The copy will only be made if the file is changed
after the last backup.
Check the option Keep history of files for Replayer and Editing if the
backups have to be made. The backups are used in the Replayer (see
page 389) and in the Editing (see page 395) when a log data file is
opened. The log data file will use the available files from the backup to
show the information. For instance when the color table is changed after
the data is logged; the color table that was used during the logging will be
used if ‘Color Tables’ is checked for a backup.
To avoid that the backup folder will be overloaded with backups, a
maximum number of days can be set. If a backup is older it will be
removed from the backup folder.
5.4.1.7 Disk Space
Figure 5-11 Set when the oldest log data files have to be deleted
It is possible that a lot of information is logged during a survey, for

instance two sonar’s with snippets and side scan data, and then the hard
disk will be full in a short period. To avoid this problem the user can define
when the oldest log data files are removed (deleted) from the hard disk.
Two different options can be used to define the criteria to delete the
oldest log data files.
With the option When files are older than the files older than the number
of days set will be deleted.

With the option When free disk space is lower than the oldest files will be
deleted when the free hard disk space is lower than the specified GB’s.
The user can select one of the option or both. When both options are
selected then when one of the two options is valid the oldest log data files
will be deleted.
It is advisable to select always the option When free disk space is lower
 than because if the number of days is too high then it is possible that the
hard disk is full before the oldest log data files are deleted. A full hard disk
will stop the system.
 It is very important to backup the old log data files before one of the
options becomes valid; otherwise the log data files are lost.
5.4.1.8 Alert Sounds
Figure 5-12 Select the alerts sounds for the alarms
If external speakers are connected to the PC the alert sounds can be

used. These three sounds are .WAV files and are placed in the PDS2000
tab of the Explorer.
For the three severities are a low, intermediate and high sound created.
Click on to hear the selected sound.
If no external speakers are available, the internal speaker of the computer
can be used to generate beeps. Select the option Use beeps and three
different predefined beeps will be used.
The different severities for the alarms can be set for each alarm in the
Conditions window for the Alarms (see page 129).
5.4.1.9 Options
Figure 5-13 Select the options
This page will show options that can be important to display or compute
data.
Show multibeam beams with no bottom detection
In PDS2000 the beams that have no bottom detection get a 0 (zero)
for the beam Z. By default the zero beams will not be displayed in the
views of PDS2000. When the user wants to see the zero beams then
he can check this option.
Lat/Lon on Local Spheroid – Lat/Lon on Satellite Spheroid
The user can select by selecting one of these options which latitude
and longitude are displayed in PDS2000.

Lat and Lon mean the latitude and longitude on the local spheroid and
Sat Lat and Sat Lon on the satellite spheroid (normally WGS’84).
5.4.1.10 GPS Time Parameters
Figure 5-14 Leap seconds as a GPS time parameter
This page will show the settings for the GPS time parameters. At the
moment only one setting is available.
st Leap Seconds
From 1 of January 2013 The leap seconds for GPS receivers with a GPS time. The leap
the number of leap
seconds is 16.
seconds are used to correct the GPS time to UTC time.
The leap seconds as set here will be used through PDS2000.
5.4.1.11 Sonar Target Parameters
Figure 5-15 Sonar Targets file selection and list with classifications
Select or create in this page the active sonar targets file which can be
used in the Acquisition, Presentations, Replay and Editing.
The sonar targets can be classified. The user can make his own list of
classifications which can be used to classify the sonar targets. It is always
possible to classify a sonar target with a classification that is not in the list.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets view
in the Chapter Views (see page 376).

5.4.1.12 Icon Images
Figure 5-16 Icon Images file selection
Select or create in this page the active icon images file which can be used
at the moment only in the Acquisition, Presentations, and Replay.
For more information about the sonar targets see the option Add Icon
Image in the chapter Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu on page
352.
5.4.2 Selecting the Application Type
Figure 5-17 Select Application Type
From the list of application types, select the one that describes the project
the best. The type and number of possible sensors and computations that

can be used in PDS2000 is set by the application type. The availability of
application types depends on the purchased options that are laid down in
the dongle.
5.4.3 Run the Configuration Wizard
Figure 5-18 Run Configuration Wizard page
By checking Run the configuration wizard the wizard goes over in a menu
where the configuration can be saved. When a name is given, click on
and the wizard will continue with the configuration name and the
vessels page (see below).
Is Run the configuration wizard not checked then by clicking on
the wizard will be finished and the configuration will not be saved. A new
configuration has to be made with the menu option Acquisition > New >
Configuration….

5.4.4 Vessel Selection
Figure 5-19 Vessels page to add or select the vessels
Depending on the application type, one or more vessel(s) can be entered

on the page and the used vessels will be checked.
With a vessel can be added to the project and with the
vessel configuration of the selected vessel will be opened (see for the
vessel configuration the chapter ‘Vessel Configuration’ on page 91).
Local
All the vessels from the Click on to open the Add Local Vessel window. Select one of
projects on the local the available vessel configurations.
computer and all the
Click on to create a new vessel configuration. The vessel
common vessels are
available in Add Local wizard will start with the Vessel Name page where a new name for the
Vessel. vessel has to be defined and will continue through all the pages of the
vessel configuration (see page 91).
Figure 5-20 Select a vessel (configuration) or create a new vessel
Remote
Vessels which are created on another location, that means for
instance on another ship, can be added or edited. This other ship can
be monitored by reading the data from that ship. To get a connection
with the other ship the Control Center on the remote vessel has to be
running.

Figure 5-21 Select a Remote Vessel and download the vessel
configuration
 Give the hostname or the IP-address of the remote vessel. The port
704 will be used to get the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel. Do not change this port number!!
During the acquisition the sensor data from the remote vessel can be
read, but because of the data load an update rate can be set. Check
the option Use limited data update rate and set the update rate (in the
example above on 5 seconds).
Click on to download the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel.
If the vessel configuration on the remote vessel is changed or the
update rate has to be changed, click on under ‘Remote’ to
download the new vessel configuration or modify the update rate.
5.4.5 Layout
Figure 5-22 Layouts page of the configuration
The layouts page shows where the real time modules are displayed. The
module Control Center is by default on the local computer. The
acquisition server and presentations can be on the local computer or on
another computer in the network.
Click on to add new presentations to the list. Select one of the
modules and click on or just click on to go to the Layout
dialog.

Figure 5-23 Layout dialog
If the layout is not running on the local computer (main PDS2000) but on
a remote computer, give the name of the remote computer or select with
the computer in the network.
The name of the layout can be selected. Click on to create a new
empty layout. This empty layout can be filled with views in the Acquisition
or Presentation. It is better not to use the same name for the layout in the
Acquisition and in the Presentation.
The UI (User Interface) profile is always the default. The user can defined
a UI profile where his own toolbar and ‘shortcut keys’ settings are saved.
Click on , give a new name for the profile and make the module
according the wishes of the user. A new UI profile starts always with the
default settings for the shortcuts and the toolbar.
5.4.6 Events
Figure 5-24 Events page of the configuration
On this page the events can be defined. Three automatic eventing modes
In the real time mode are available, conditions can be set and an event string can be defined.
manually eventing is
possible with F6.
For more detailed information about events see chapter ‘Events’ on page
155.

5.4.7 Alarms
Figure 5-25 Alarms page in the configuration
On the alarms page real time alarms can be defined. The alarms are
related to the configuration and will be active for each vessel in the
configuration.
Vessel specific alarms can be set in the vessel configuration (see page
129).
When an alarm is added a Conditions window, similar to the one in the
Vessel Alarms on page 129, is opened. In this window the alarm can be
defined.
If the condition for an alarm is not known yet leave the alarms page
empty. When an alarm is required on a measurement it is easy to make a
condition in the Acquisition with Edit > Alarms (see page 254). That way,
alarms can be checked immediately.

5.4.8 Closing the Wizard
Figure 5-26 Last page of the new project wizard
Click on in the alarms page to close the wizard and once more on
in the ‘Wizard is Finished’ page.
5.5 Create Project from Log Data

If the user has only a standard PDS2000 logging file available, it is
possible to create a new project with the project configuration and the
vessel configuration from the logging file.
To create a new project select File > Create Project from Log Data… from
the menu bar in the Control Center and a standard Open dialog will be
opened. Select in this dialog the logging file for the new project.
Give in the Project Name dialog a new project name and click on
and the new project will be created.
The selected logging file will be copied from the original location to the
LogData folder in the new created project.
At the moment a configuration file is not created, because the relevant
 information for the configuration is not available in the logging file. The
user has to create a new configuration with the configuration wizard.
Select Acquisition > New > Configuration…from the menu bar in the
Control Center to start the wizard and the Configuration Name window will
be opened. Give a name for the configuration and click on to
continue the wizard. The wizard will open sequentially the vessels page
(see page 66), the layouts page (see page 67), the events page (see
page 68) and the alarms page (see page 69).

6 Coordinate System
6.1 Introduction
In PDS2000, a coordinate system database is available where for the
most common countries the standard coordinate systems are predefined.
It is also possible for the user to add new coordinate systems to the
database.
The active coordinate system has to be selected in the Project
Configuration (see page 58).
A new coordinate system can be created in the Project Configuration and
in the PDS2000 tab of the Explorer (see page 215). The new coordinate
systems will be stored in a separate database, where all the user defined
coordinate systems are available.
In the PDS2000 tab of the Explorer two different databases are available,
It is not possible to modify the pdsgeodatabase and the pdsusergeobase. The pdsgeodatabase is
the predefined coordinate the database with all the predefined coordinate systems and the
systems. pdsusergeobase is the database with all the user defined coordinate
systems.
In this chapter will be discussed how to select, to create and/or modify a
coordinate system through the Project Configuration. For creating and/or
modifying a coordinate system in the ‘Explorer – General’ the same
dialogs and windows will be used.
Select in the Control Center the menu item Edit > Project Configuration or
click on in the toolbar and select in the Project Configuration window
the option ‘Coordinate System’.
PDS2000 - User Manual Coordinate System  71

Figure 6-1 Project Configuration with the option Coordinate System
6.2 Project Coordinate System

The coordinate system that has to be used in the project can be selected
in the Project Configuration window, see Figure 6-1.
If another coordinate system has to be used, click on and select
one of the existing coordinate systems in the Select Coordinate System
window (see page 74). The predefined coordinate systems are specified
per country and the coordinate systems which are created by the user are
in the group ‘User Defined Coordinate Systems’ or in a group created by
the user.
If none of the coordinate systems can be used for the project, a new
coordinate system has to be created with the Coordinate System
Wizard(see below).
72  Coordinate System PDS2000 - User Manual

6.3 Coordinate System Wizard
Click on in the Project Configuration to create a new coordinate
system and the coordinate system wizard will be started.
6.3.1 New Coordinate System
Figure 6-2 New Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
Give a name for the new coordinate system and check the option Based
on existing coordinate system if an existing coordinate system has to be
used as a start for the new coordinate system.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard.
If the option Based on existing coordinate system is checked the next
page is the Select Coordinate System page (see below) to select from the
list an existing coordinate system.
If the option is not checked the user can select a satellite and local
ellipsoid from the list in the Ellipsoids page (see page 75).

6.3.2 Select Coordinate System
Figure 6-3 Select Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The base of an existing On this page the user can select one of the existing coordinate systems
coordinate system is as a base for the new coordinate system. All the coordinate systems as
always both ellipsoids. The defined in both databases (pdsgeodatabase and pdsusergeobase) are
other settings of the available in the list of coordinate systems.
system can be modified.
If an existing coordinate system is selected, click on to go to the
next page of the wizard. The next page will be the Datum Transformation
Parameters page (see page 78).

6.3.3 Ellipsoids
Figure 6-4 Ellipsoids page of the Coordinate System Wizard
This page will be opened if the user create a new coordinate system that
is not based on an existing coordinate system.
It is not possible to create Click on to select a satellite ellipsoid and a local ellipsoid from the
a new ellipsoid. list of ellipsoids.
Figure 6-5 Select an ellipsoid from the list of available ellipsoids in PDS2000
If both ellipsoids are selected, click on to go to the next page of

the wizard. This page will be the Datum Transformation page (see below).

6.3.4 Datum Transformation
Figure 6-6 Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The user can choose to use an existing datum transformation or create a

new datum transformation that can be based on an existing datum
transformation or not.
If the option Use existing datum transformation is selected the parameters
of the selected datum transformation cannot be modified. With option
New datum transformation in combination with the option Based on
existing datum transformation an existing datum transformation can be
modified.
Select only the option New datum transformation if a complete new datum
transformation has to be created.
If only the option New datum transformation is checked, the next page will
be the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see page 78).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Datum
Transformation page (see below).

6.3.5 Select Datum Transformation
Figure 6-7 Select Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System

Wizard
On this page only the datum transformations that are possible between
the two selected ellipsoids of the new coordinate system will be available.
If one of the datum transformations is selected, click on to go to
the next page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the
Datum Transformation page (see page 76) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing datum transformation was checked the next
page will be the Geoid Model page (see page 79).
For the other options the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see
page 78) will be opened.

6.3.6 Datum Transformation Parameters
Figure 6-8 Datum Transformation Parameters of the Coordinate System

Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Datum Transformation page (see page
76) the option New datum transformation is checked. If also the option
Based on existing datum transformation is checked, first the Select Datum
Transformation page (see page 77) is opened before the Datum
Transformation Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a new name for the to be created new datum transformation.
Method
At the moment the only available method is the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Shift X, Y and Z
The translations in the X, Y and Z direction, to translate from the
satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Rotation X, Y and Z
The rotations around the X, Y and Z axis, to rotate from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Scale factor (ppm)
The scale factor between the two ellipsoids in parts per million (ppm).
Prime meridian shift Greenwich (deg)
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
File name
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Description
The user can enter a short description for the new datum
transformation.
If all the parameters are entered, click on to go to the next page
of the wizard. The next page will be the Geoid Model page (see below).

6.3.7 Geoid Model
Figure 6-9 Geoid Model page of the Coordinate System Wizard
In this page a geoid model can be selected for the coordinate system.
The geoid model will correct the satellite ellipsoid height to a local height.
The methods available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest geoid model for Belgium.
DeMin
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
Denmark DVR90
The latest geoid model for Denmark.
EGM2008
The Earth Gravitational Model 2008 is a spherical harmonic model of
the earth’s gravitational potential.
Grid Model (Grid coordinates)
If this option is selected, a geoid model grid model can be selected
The geoid model grid model with grid projection coordinates (easting and northing).
has to be created in the grid
model editor (see page 524). Grid Model (Satellite coordinates)
If this option is selected, a geoid model grid model can be selected
with satellite ellipsoid coordinates (latitude and longitude in WGS’84).
Norway
For Norway the latest geoid model file is available: HREF2008a.
Null Model
A geoid model with a 0 (zero) correction. This model can be used to
get the GPS antenna height as a local height.

OSGM02 – GB
The latest geoid model for England, Scotland and Wales.
This geoid model can only be used in a coordinate system with
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is
that this geoid model contains the National Grid coordinates and not
the latitude and longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the
other geoid models do.
OSGM02 – NI
The latest geoid model for Northern Ireland.
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
OSGM02 – RoI
The latest geoid model for Republic of Ireland.
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
Quasigeod EGG97
The European Gravimetric Geoid based on all high-resolution gravity
and terrain data available in 1997.
If this option is selected, a BIN file can be selected. This BIN file is
standard not available in PDS2000, it has to be order. The BIN file has
to be placed in the folder Project Common Files.
RDNAPTRANS2004
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest geoid model for The Netherlands.
Sweden
For Sweden the following geoid models are available: SWEN01L,
SWEN08_RH2000 and SWEN08_RH70.
US State Plane
The geoid models for the United States on the NAD83 State Planes.
PDS2000 will detect which geoid model has to be used.
At the moment PDS2000 uses the GEOID06 and GEOID09 model for
Alaska and the GEIOD03 and GEOID09 models for all other states.
Select 2003, 2006 or 2009 and the right geoid model will be used.
When for instance 2006 is selected and the location is not Alaska
PDS2000 will select the state plane from 2003.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Unit page (see below).

6.3.8 Unit
Figure 6-10 Unit page of the Coordinate System Wizard
Select an unit that will be used for the projection parameters. Because
this unit is used for the projection it will become the system unit for the
project.
Click on to create a new unit type and the New Unit dialog will be
opened.
Figure 6-11 New Unit dialog to create a new unit type
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created unit type.
Meters per unit
Enter the number of meters per one new unit.
Name suffix
Give a suffix for the new unit type, like a ‘m’ for meters.
If the right unit is selected or create, click on to go to the next
page of the wizard. The next page will be the Projection page (see
below).

6.3.9 Projection
Figure 6-12 Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The user can choose to use an existing projection or create a new

projection that can be based on an existing projection or not.
If the option Use existing projection is selected the parameters of the
selected projection cannot be modified. With the option New projection in
combination with the option Based on existing projection an existing
projection can be modified.
Select only the option New projection if a complete new projection has to
be created.
If only the option New projection is checked, the next page will be the
Projection Parameters page (see page 84).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Projection page
(see below).

6.3.10 Select Projection
Figure 6-13 Select Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard
On this page all the projections will be available. If a projection is selected

with a different unit as selected before an error message will appear
where is mentioned that an other unit has to be selected if this selected
projection has to be used.
If one of the projections is selected, click on to go to the next
page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the Projection
page (see page 82) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing projection was checked the next page will be the
Post Correction page (see page 85).
For the other options the Projection Parameters page (see page 84) will
be opened.

6.3.11 Projection Parameters
Figure 6-14 Projection Parameters page of the Coordinate System Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Projection page (see page 82) the
option New projection is checked. If also the option Based on existing
projection is checked, first the Select Projection page (see page 83) is
opened before the Projection Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created projection.
Unit
The unit that will be used cannot be changed on this page. If the unit
has to be changed click on to go back to the Unit page (see
page 81).
Method
In PDS2000 several projection methods are available.
 Cassini-Soldner
 Hotine Oblique Mercator (A)
 Hotine Oblique Mercator (B)
 Lambert 1 Parallel
 Lambert 2 Parallel
 Mercator
 RD (is only valid with the unit Meters)
 Transverse Mercator
 Stereographic
 Universal Transverse Mercator (is only valid with the unit
Meters)
The number of parameters on this page will depend on the projection
method that is selected. The values of the parameters False Easting and
False Northing have to be in the unit, which is mentioned on this page.

If all the parameters are entered, click on to get to the next page
of the wizard. This next page will be the Post Correction page (see
below).
6.3.12 Post Correction
Figure 6-15 Post Correction page of the Coordinate System Wizard
It is possible that a position calculated on the local grid not match with the
actual X, Y and Z for that point. With a post correction this point can be
moved so it match with the actual grid coordinates. This post correction is
only applied when a calculation is done from the local ellipsoid to the local
grid or vice versa.
On this page two ways to add a post correction are possible, manual or
with a model. The manual post correction is always a fixed shift in all the
X, Y and/or Z coordinates, while with post correction with a model for
each point a different shift can be used.
The models available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest post correction model for Belgium.
Denmark DVR90
The latest post correction model for Denmark.
HARN
The latest correction model for the United States.
If HARN or OSTN02 is In theory is HARN a correction on the local latitude and longitude and
selected, PDS2000 will correct not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS2000 the only place for a post
the local ellipsoid coordinates correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
before the coordinates are
projected on the grid.
OSTN02
The latest post correction model for England, Scotland and Wales.
In theory is OSTN02 a correction on the local latitude and longitude
and not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS2000 the only place for a
post correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
 This correction can only be used in a coordinate system with ETRS89

– GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is that this
correction are specific calculated for this coordinate system.

RDNAPTRANS2004
The old post correction model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest post correction model for The Netherlands.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Save Coordinate System page (see below).
6.3.13 Save Coordinate System
Figure 6-16 Save Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
A new coordinate system cannot be saved in the group with the

predefined coordinate systems, it has to be saved in the always existing
User Defined Coordinate Systems or in a group which is created by the
user.
Select where the new coordinate system has to be saved, click on
to go to the last page of the wizard, the Coordinate System
Overview page (see below).

6.3.14 Coordinate System Overview
Figure 6-17 Coordinate System Overview page of the Coordinate System

Wizard
On this page an overview is given of all the settings for the new
coordinate system.
Click on to check the new coordinate system by entering a
known point in the Geo Calculator (see page 194).
If the new coordinate system is accepted, click on to save the
coordinate system in the group as selected by the user. If one of the
settings in the overview is not right, click on to go back the
relevant page in the wizard to change the settings. It is also possible to
save the coordinate system and use the Edit option (see below) to
change the coordinate system.
6.4 Edit Coordinate System

It is possible to modify the selected coordinate system in the Project
Configuration window (see Figure 6-1 on page 72). Click on in
the Project Configuration window to open the Edit Coordinate System
window.
If the coordinate system is created by the user or is created with the
information from an old project, it is possible to modify the complete
 coordinate system. For the pre-defined (country) coordinate systems only
the geoid model can be modified!!
When for a pre-defined coordinate system a different geoid model is
 selected the coordinate system cannot be saved. It will be available is the

project, but it cannot be selected from the database. If this coordinate
system has to be used for other purposes it is better to make a new (user
 defined) coordinate system that is based on the existing pre-defined

coordinate system (see page 73) with a different geoid model. This user
defined coordinate system is stored in the database.
This window can also be opened in the ‘Explorer – PDS2000’ (see
pagexxx). Select in the Coordinate System Databases the file

pdsusergeobase and click on the option Edit in the context menu to open
the Select Coordinate System window.
Figure 6-18 Select Coordinate System window with only the user defined
coordinate systems
Select one of the user defined coordinate systems and click on

to open the Edit Coordinate System Window.
Figure 6-19 Edit Coordinate System window with an user defined coordinate
system
This window gives an overview of the selected user defined coordinate

system. In this window it is possible to modify the coordinate system.

From the pre-defined coordinate systems only the geoid model can be
modified, the user defined coordinate systems can be modified
 completely. For all pre-defined coordinate system only the geoid models
EGM2008, Grid Model (Grid and Satellite coordinates) and Null Model are
available and for some systems also the local geoid model, if available.
For different geoid models first the method or country has to be selected
 before a geoid model file, if needed, can be selected. This is for instance
valid for Sweden and US State Plane.
When a geoid model is added to a pre-defined coordinate systems, the
coordinate system cannot be stored in the geodatabase. In the project the
 coordinate system can be used. But when the user wants to use it in the
Geo Calculator or in other projects it is better to make an user defined
coordinate systems based on the pre-defined and add the geoid model.
The different parts of this window have the same functionality as the
different pages in the coordinate system wizard (see page 73).
It is possible to select a different ellipsoid for the coordinate system. But
the consequence is then that also the datum transformation parameters
and the name has to be modified.
If the parameters of a datum transformation are changed and the name of
 the datum transformation not, then when the coordinate system is saved
with the datum transformation is also changed in the coordinate
systems where the same name for the datum transformation is used.
There is also a relation between the selection of the projection and the
unit. Because the parameters of for instance the Easting and Northing in
the projection are specified in the unit that is selected for the coordinate
system.

7 Vessel Configuration
7.1 Introduction
PDS2000 always needs a vessel configuration before the Acquisition can
be started. The vessel configuration will contain all the settings which are
necessary to do all the measurements.
Before a vessel configuration can be made a project has to be setup as
discussed in chapter ‘Starting PDS2000’ on page 53.
7.2 Setup a Vessel Configuration

There are several ways in PDS2000 to create or modify a vessel
configuration.
1. In the New Project Wizard a new vessel configuration can be created
in the Vessel Selection (see page 66).
2. In the ‘Explorer – Project – Vessels’ a vessel configuration can be
created (option New File) or the existing one (option Edit) can be
modified (see ‘Project Database’ on page 219).
3. With Acquisition > Configuration from the menu bar or with from
the toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window is opened
and in the tab Vessel the existing vessel configuration can be edited.
Click on to view and/or modify the settings of the vessel
configuration.
Click on to open the Add Local Vessel window. Click on
to start the vessel wizard to create a new vessel
configuration.
4. With Acquisition > New > Vessel… from the menu bar of the Control
Center a vessel wizard will be started to create a vessel configuration.
Use and to go through the vessel configuration
wizard. The tabs are not visible.
This vessel wizard is identical with the vessel wizard that can be
started in the Vessel Selection of the New Project Wizard (see page
66).
The vessel configuration editor will be used to explain the setup of the
vessel configuration. Each page in the vessel wizard is a tab in the vessel
configuration editor. In the editor are even more tabs available then pages
in the wizard.
PDS2000 - User Manual Vessel Configuration  91

7.2.1 New Vessel Configuration
With one of the above mentioned methods a new vessel configuration can
be created. The first page of the wizard is the Vessel Name page.
Figure 7-1 First page of the new vessel wizard
A new name for the vessel configuration has to be entered. The user can
choose to create a complete new vessel configuration or to use an
existing vessel configuration as template.
When the option Use existing vessel as template is checked, the user can
select from all the vessel configurations that are available in the Projects
Common Files map.
 Click on to continue with the wizard. It can take a while before the
next page of the wizard will be opened. The reason is that PDS2000 first
check if the new vessel configuration name exists or not. If the name
already exists an error message will appear and the user can enter a
different name.
The next pages of the wizard will be explained with the separate tab
pages below.
92  Vessel Configuration PDS2000 - User Manual

7.3 Geometry
Figure 7-2 Geometry page of the vessel configuration
The first page in the vessel configuration is the vessel geometry with the
vessel visualization, vessel draught, vessel turn radius, sea level, vertical
position and the offsets on the vessel.
Visualization mode 2D
Select as 2D vessel contour a vessel contour (made in PDS2000) or a
vessel Wireframe; after that select the file for the selected
A vessel wireframe is a 3D visualization.
drawing of the vessel and
can be used in the 3D
Click on to create a new vessel contour in PDS2000 or click
views in PDS2000. It is on to open the selected vessel contour. In both cases the
also possible to display the vessel contour editor will be opened (see page 95). For a survey
wireframe in the standard vessel usually only a top view is entered.
2D views. These Select the active shape (vessel contour) that will be displayed in the
wireframes should be 3D Acquisition.
DXF files.
Visualization mode 3D
Select as 3D vessel contour a vessel Wireframe or a 3D Studio file;
after that select the file for the selected visualization.
Vessel
Draught
The draught is the distance from the waterline to the deepest point
on the vessel and is always positive. It is used in computations
such as depth below keel.

Turn radius
Turn radius of the vessel is used to compute the lead-in lines (see
page 138) and for autopilot outputs.
Sea level
Sea level is the distance from the CGP (Center of Gravity Point) on
the vessel to the waterline and will be positive when the waterline is
above the CGP.
Center of Gravity Point Offset
Enter the offset from the CRP (Common Reference Point) to the
CGP (Center of Gravity Point).
When RTK is used the This offset is needed when tide is used in combination with sea
Center of Gravity Point level and the CRP is far away from the CRP; for instance the CRP
Offset is not relevant. is on the bow where the multibeam with its sensors is located.
Vessel vertical position
Select that the selected vessel is above water level (Surface) or under
water (Subsurface). PDS2000 has to know how the depths have to be
calculated. For a surface vessel the measured depth is the actual
depth but for a subsurface vessel the measured depth has to be
combined with the depth of the vessel (for instance a ROV or an AUV)
to get the actual depth.
Offsets
This is just a list of offsets, An offset is a point of interest on the vessel, such as the location of a
at a later stage offsets are
assigned to the sensors.
sensor. The ’Zero Offset’ is a PDS2000 pre-defined offset, the CRP
and cannot be changed.
Click on for an overview of the vessel contour and offsets. A top-
and a starboard view of the vessel are shown. If no vessel contour is
available, a default contour will be used.
PDS2000 uses a vessel coordinate system. This system is centered
around an arbitrary point on the vessel. This point is called the CRP and
has the coordinates X=0, Y=0 and Z=0. The units used are the PDS2000
computation units. Offsets and contour points are entered relative to the
CRP, using the sign convention as shown in the figure below. Sensor
offsets are entered from the CRP to the sensor.
+Z
Top
-X +Y
Port Bow
CRP
X=0
Y=0
Z=0
-Y +X
Stern Starboard
-Z
Bottom
Figure 7-3 Vessel coordinate system

7.3.1 Vessel Contour
Figure 7-4 Vessel Contour editor
The options in the right top panel of the vessel contour editor are:
Name: Point(x)
Add the X and Y value for point(x) in the vessel coordinate system.
Type
Point. Select this type if point(x) is not a start of line or a start of
polygon.
Start of Line. Select this type if point(x) is the first point of the line. Until
a new start of line or start of polygon is selected all points after this
point will be part of the line.
Start of Polygon. Select this type if point(x) is the first point of the
polygon. Until a new start of line or start of polygon is selected all
points after this point will be part of the polygon. The polygon will be
solid.
The buttons and options on the right side in the editor are:
Add a new point to the contour. The added point comes always at the
end of the list.
Insert a new point above the location of the cursor in the list.
Delete the selected point from the list.
Select the view side of the vessel contour; top, bottom, left, right, front
and back.
,
Zoom Extents, Zoom In / Out.
Click on to save the vessel contour and to close the vessel
contour editor.

7.3.1.1 Import Vessel Contours
Select the view side that agrees with the view side in the DXF file. Select
in the menu bar of the Vessel Contour editor the option Import > From
DXF file to import a vessel contour. The coordinates used in the DXF file
should match the vessel coordinate system and the origin of the DXF
drawing should be the same as the CRP of the vessel.
7.4 Equipment
Figure 7-5 Equipment page of the vessel configuration
In the Equipment page the devices (sensors) are selected, linked

computation parameters are set and device tests are carried out. Which
groups of devices are available depends on the selected application type.
The vessel configuration supports also sub systems. A sub system is a
set of sensors/computations which act together and are loosely
 connected to the vessel (main system). Currently only a few sensor
groups are supported for a sub system: Multibeam, VRU, Heading and
Bearing.
The procedure to add sensors to the list is:
 From the ‘Groups’ list, select a group of devices, e.g. ‘Positioning
system Geogs’.
 From the ‘Device Drivers’ list, select the required device, e.g. ‘NMEA
2.30 GGA’ and click on to place the device in the device list. It
is not possible to give directly a distinguished name for the selected
device, see for more information ‘Aliases’ on page 128.

 When a sub system is needed, click on to add a sub system
and automatically a sub system position device is added. From now on
when a device driver is added with PDS2000 will ask to which
system the device has to be added.
Now it is also possible to move devices from the main system to the
sub system. Select a device in the main system and click on to
move the device to the sub system. From sub system to main system
is also possible.
For more information about how the sub system works see Sub
System below.
 There is a group called ‘Multibeam (All Options)’. In this group a
RESON HydroBat or RESON SeaBat 7K can be selected. When one
of these device drivers is selected, it is possible to add all related
device drivers in one time. For instance select RESON SeaBat 7K and
click on . Now a display will open where all related devices are
already selected. If necessary uncheck one of the devices and click on
to add all these devices.
 After a device driver is added to the device list, check the items in the
device or computation by selecting the device or computation and click
on to open the properties.
Most of the sensors have a timestamp mode available. When this is
For Snippets devices the
set on Computer Clock latency can be applied when available in the
offset (and multibeam data. For the other timestamps the latency have no effect.
calibration values) are For some equipment, like multibeam, position and VRU, an offset as
taken from the multibeam specified in the Geometry page has to be selected. For sub system
computation. devices the offset has to be entered manually.
 For several devices the units for the incoming data can be specified.
Normally the units as set by PDS2000 will be the system unit. If for
instance the coordinate system is in feet then the system unit is feet
and most of the values related to distance are then in feet. With
 the units can be modified when the input data has a different unit than
the system unit.
 Each device has to be assigned to a communication port. Select the
device from the device list and click on . Select a port and
change the settings if necessary. Add a new port by clicking on
If as echo sounder one of . See for more information about the interfacing on page 168.
the Navisound Graphical
168
Trace device drivers is
selected, the option By default all the selected devices are active ( ) in the device list. If one
and of the devices is not connected yet, it will give alarms in the Acquisition.
will give a To avoid these alarms, the device can be switched off in the device list by
different view (see page unchecking ( ) the device.
99).
An equipment test is possible when the selected device is attached to the
port. Click on and a test program checks the communication
with the device and the device driver.
It is recommended to test the equipment interfacing prior to the start of
the Acquisition.

Figure 7-6 Device Test
7.4.1 Sub System

An example of a sub system can be a multibeam mounted on a platform
in a moonpool of the vessel where the platform is not solid linked to the
vessel. The multibeam will require its own attitude and heading sensors.
When a sensor is added to the sub system it will not be added to a group
of the data sources. This is to avoid a selection of the wrong sensor
during a data source switching.
The sub system sensor offsets cannot be selected from the offset list but
have to be entered manually. The offsets are local offsets relative to the
sub system reference point.
The Sub System Reference Position Computation will use the local
attitude and heading sensors when available. When there is no sub
system heading, the heading from the main system reference point
computation will be used. When there is no sub system attitude, the main
system attitude will be used and converted to use the sub system heading
to sub system attitude.
The sub system position will be computed using the offset and the main
system reference point, main system heading and main system attitude.
The sub system heave will be replaced by the local heave when available.
The sub system position Z will be obtained using the offset reference
point Z minus the remote heave plus the local heave.

7.4.2 Navisound Graphical Trace
Figure 7-7 Navisound Control Center to set the port(s) and check the
communication with the echo sounder
This view will be opened when in the Equipment one of the Navisound
Graphical Trace devices is selected and on or is
clicked.
Click on in the Navisound Control Center to set the Input Port(s)

for the echo sounder. When the port(s) are set, click on or
and if the port(s) settings are right data will be displayed in the
view.
In the Equipment page the port is always NCC. The port settings for the
Navisound are stored in a different way than all the other devices in
PDS2000, it will be done through .

7.4.3 Outputs
Figure 7-8 Output Messages window
With the outputs as selected in the Equipment data can be outputted to a

different system. The default settings for the outputs can be used. If more
than one sensor of the same type is selected the output message always
use the sensor as set as primary. The user can change this by selecting
the output device and click on to open the Output Messages
window.
Select the output message and for specific output messages when the
output message is selected the Data to trigger output message becomes
available. In this box the data item can be selected that will trigger the
output message.
Select an item of the output message and the Output message element
source becomes available. In this box the source for that selected item
can be set.

7.5 Computations
Figure 7-9 Computations page in the vessel configuration
A number of standard computations are default in PDS2000. These are

displayed in the Computations page.
The number and type of standard computations depends on the selected
application type. Click on to edit the properties of the selected
computation. For the standard computations the user influence on the
properties is limited. Nevertheless, it is advisable to check and inspect
each property carefully and set the associated parameters as required.
7.5.1 Advanced Computations

Apart from the standard computations, advanced or user computations
can be added. For normal survey operations it is expected that these
additional computations are not required. Advanced computations are
seen as an option for special operations. A lot of the advanced
computations are already available as a linked computation with a
selected device driver.
Click on in the Computations page (see above) to open the
Advanced Computations page.

Figure 7-10 Advanced Computations page
is grayed out The user selects the required computations from the left window and adds
when a computation is not these with to the list of defined computations. By default the given
possible (anymore) for the computation name will be used and the properties of the selected
chosen application type. computation will be opened.
The properties of the added computations can be opened by selecting the
computation in the defined computations list and click on to
access the properties of that computation.

7.6 Data Sources
Figure 7-11 Data Sources page in the vessel configuration
A data source is a computation in PDS2000. An item in the ‘Data groups'

can be a computation or a device and can give an input to a data source
with assigned priorities.
Example: The data source 'Position' computes the position of the vessel.
In the ‘Data Groups’ two items can compute the position. One item can be
moved to the top and gets number 1, that item becomes the primary data
input for the Position computation. The others become the secondary
computation.
PDS2000 can automatically switch between data groups with a user
definable condition. Double click on the first data group item or select the
first data group item and click on to enter the switch
parameters.
At the start of every cycle in PDS2000 the order in the data group is as
specified in the data group list and the conditions will be checked. It is not
necessary to set a condition for the secondary device to go back to the
primary. This will be done automatically after each cycle in PDS2000.

Figure 7-12 Condition added
Figure 7-13 Creating a condition
Multiple conditions can be set on any data source. If one of the conditions
is ‘true’ it will lower the rank of the source, provided automatic switch is
checked in the Data Sources page.
7.7 Guidance
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks or towards a pre-defined location or area. The guidance methods
are:
1. Route
2. Runlines
3. Waypoints
4. Design Model
5. Cutter Dredge
6. Work Areas
7. Restricted Areas
8. Vessel Placement
9. Dredge Instruction
10. Object Distance
The number of guidance methods that is available is depending on the
selected application type.

Each method has its own definitions and computations. An application
can have many guidance files of any of the types above and it is possible
to select a file in the Acquisition.
There is a number of ways the guidance can be setup or modified. As it is
a part of the vessel configuration, all methods to open the vessel
configuration can be used to open the guidance window. On top of that
most of the individual guidance file can be opened in the Explorer (see
page 219).
For more details about guidance see the chapter Guidance on page 131.
7.8 Tools
The Tools page is skipped in the vessel configuration wizard. If the vessel
configuration is opened outside the wizard always the interval logging tab
is available.
For several applications like (Rope) Excavator, Cutter, Trailing Suction
Hopper, Maggy Survey and Multibeam Survey extra tabs are added to the
Tool page.
The different tabs in the Tools Page are:
 Anchor Definition (see below)
 Crane Configuration (see page 107)
 Cutter (see page 109)
 Dredge Logging Settings (see page 110)
 Interval Logging (see page 111)
 Magnometer Dialog (see page 113)
 Pipe Configuration (see page 114)
 Production Parameters (see page 115)
 Trip Registration (see page 116)

7.8.1 Anchor Definition
The Anchor Definition is only available when the option is set in the
dongle.
Figure 7-14 Tools page with the Anchor Definition page of the cutter dredge
application
In the Anchor Definition page the anchor definitions for the vessel
(pontoon) and the handling tugs can be specified.

7.8.2 Crane Configuration
The crane configuration is available for the (Rope) Excavator application.
Excavator:
Figure 7-15 Tools page with the Crane Configuration page of the excavator
application
This page is to setup the crane configuration for an excavator with a

backhoe, a pump or a grab.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the stick and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom, stick and tool can be calibrated (see page 258). For some ‘Dredge
Positioning Systems’ a fourth subpage is available for the bucket steering
and the engine control.
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the
‘Excavator’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

Rope Excavator:
Figure 7-16 Tools page with the Rope page of the rope excavator application
This Tools page is valid for the Rope Excavator application to setup the
crane configuration for a rope excavator with a backhoe.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the rope and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom and rope can be calibrated (see page 258).
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the ‘Rope
Excavator’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

7.8.3 Cutter
Figure 7-17 Tools page with the Cutter configuration page
This Tools page is valid for the Cutter Dredge application to setup the
cutter configuration.
For more information about the Cutter see the manual for the ‘Cutter
Dredge’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

7.8.4 Dredge Logging Settings
Figure 7-18 Tools page with the Dredge Logging Settings page of the
excavator application
This page is to setup the logging conditions for the grid model logging
with a (rope) excavator, cutter or hopper.
In the Logging page the grid model logging should be setup as explained
 on page 119. Next to that setup the option Enable grid model logging
should be checked otherwise there is no grid model logging in the
Acquisition.

7.8.5 Interval Logging
Figure 7-19 Tools page with the Interval Logging page of a cutter dredge
application
This Tools page is present for all different type of applications.

Check the option Enable interval logging and a table will be displayed. In
the table items can be selected that will be displayed in the Interval
Logging view in the Acquisition and logged in an interval log file.
At the bottom of the window the user can select if he wants the interval
logging file per day or per week. For the week period the start day can be
set. Also the logging interval in the file can be specified.
The user can set the what type of time format has to be logged in the file.
The option Use windows date, time makes a date and time column in the
file, while the option Use only item values makes a column with the
st
number of days since 1 of January 1900.
 In the Logging page the interval logging format have to be checked before
an interval log file is created (see page 123).
Item to log
Double click on a field and the Select Data window will be opened. In
this window the item from one of the available computations can be
selected.
When an item is selected automatically the row is filled with the default
settings.
User name
Double click on a field and the text in the field can be modified.
This name will be visible in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.

Method
Three options are available to select as method to display the values
in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.
Sampling. The last value will be displayed.
Averaging. The displayed value is the average of all the values in that
period.
Cumulating. All the values of that period are added together, a
cumulated value is displayed.
Start day
Select a day when the interval logging has to start.
Now. The interval logging will be started directly.
Today. The interval logging will start today at the time as specified in
the column ‘Start time’.
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and
Saturday. The interval logging will start on the specified day of the
week at the time as specified in the column ‘Start time’.
Start time
The interval logging will start on the time as specified in the start time.
When the start time is earlier than the actual time the interval logging
will not start.
When for ‘Start day’ today or one of the days of the week is selected
the default start time become 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and the
user can modify the start time.

Period
At the end of a period the actual value will be logged to the interval log
file.
By default the period is set on 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and
the user can modify the period.
Reset
The reset is for the methods averaging and cumulating.
Yes. The calculation starts again when a new period starts.
No. The calculation continues after a new period is started.
In the Acquisition the interval logging can be monitored in the Raw Data
view and in the Interval Logging view (see page 302).
 When in the Logging page the Interval Logging Format is checked (see
page 123) then the data will be logged in the file xxxx_Interval.log-
yyyymmdd.csv in the Logdata directory of the project, where xxxx is the
vessel name.

7.8.6 Magnometer Dialog
Figure 7-20 The Tools page with the Magnetometer Dialog page of the maggy
survey application
This Tools page is valid for the Maggy Survey application to setup the
offsets for a multi-channel magnetometer.
The number of channels that will setup by default will depend on the
magnetometer device driver that is selected in the Equipment.

7.8.7 Pipe Configuration
Figure 7-21 Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application to setup the
pipe segments.
In the Pipe Configuration page the configuration for a suction tube with a
bend, an upper pipe, a lower pipe and a draghead (suction head) has to
be setup. When the trailing suction hopper has a starboard and port
suction tube two Pipe Configuration pages are available in the Tools
page.
‘Trailing Suction Hopper’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

7.8.8 Production Parameters
Figure 7-22 Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing
suction hopper application for two bunkers
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application.

In the Production Parameters page the settings for the production
computation has to be set. With these settings and the draught the load
and the production of the vessel can be calculated.
The same page with only the Product specification section is valid for the
Cutter Dredge and the Excavator applications.

7.8.9 Trip Registration
Figure 7-23 Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trialing Suction Hopper application.

In the Trip Registration page the definition for a start and end of a trip can
be set. Also the definition for a track plot and/or a report at the end of the
trip can be defined.

7.9 Logging
Figure 7-24 Logging page in the vessel configuration
How the logging is done is defined in the Logging page. The dialog sets
the file formats, manages log space and sets the log conditions. The
layout of the Logging page depends on the selected application type and
on the selected logging formats.
On top of the page it is possible to change the log directory. Select an
existing directory or enter in the box a new log directory. This is same
option as in the Log Files page of the Project Configuration (see page 59).
7.9.1 File Formats

The number of available file formats depends on the selected application
type. The following file formats are supported by PDS2000:
 PDS2000 Format (see below)
 PDS2000 Grid Model (see page 119)
 Winfrog Format (see page 119)
 Simrad EM3000 Format (see page 119)
 Cleaned XYZ Data (see page 119)
 Production Format (see page 120)
 Dredge Track Format (see page 120)
 DXF Format (see page 120)
 XTF Format (see page 120)

 Backscatter Grid Model (see page 121)
 S7K Format (see page 122)
 SDS Format (see page 123)
 Interval Logging Format (see page 123)
 FAU Format (see page 123)
 GSF Format (see page 124)
If one of the files is created in the Replay, its name will be extended with ‘-
R-date-time’ whereby ‘date-time’ are the date and time of the replay.
Every time PDS2000 opens a module, like the Control Center or
Acquisition, the activities done in that module are logged in a file. There
will be one file per day. The file name is ‘Modulename_date.LOG’
7.9.1.1 PDS2000 Format

This is the standard PDS2000 logging format. The file contains
configuration parameters and raw sensor data.
Figure 7-25 Log File Index in the logging page for PDS2000 format
Index file after logging means that direct after the log file is closed an
index file of the log file is created. This will save time when the log file is
opened in for instance the Editing.
Figure 7-26 Backup log in the logging page for PDS2000 format
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 59). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the PDS2000 logdata file also in the backup log
directory which is specified in the Project Configuration.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.PDS
The runline name is for a (rope) excavator application replaced by the
project name and for the dredge applications by the trip number.
This file name mentioned above is the default file name. With the option
user defined log file names in the Project Configuration a user-defined file
name can be defined (see page 59).
 From PDS2000 version 3.6.0.0 onwards, the sonar image, side scan and
snippets data in the PDS2000 log file is compressed to reduce the size of
the log files. When this PDS2000 log file is opened in an earlier version
 (3.5.0.x or older) the data of the sonar image, side scan or snippets
cannot be opened anymore!
From multibeam data all the pings will be logged in the PDS2000 format,
even the pings that are out of order. The pings with a bad time stamp will
only be logged when they are newer than the ping before and when they
meet the data rate criteria.

7.9.1.2 PDS2000 Grid Model
A grid model is filled with depths and can be used as an on-line coverage.
For echo sounder surveys

the grid model is not filled
with depths, but with
heights. Selection of the
minimum value gives in
that case the minimum
height, which is identical to
the maximum depth.
Figure 7-27 PDS2000 Grid Model setup in the logging page
Select the grid model file name. If no file exists click on and give a
new file name. Select one or more data types and enter a cell size.
The grid model is filled with data from the added device in Data for grid
model logging.
File name: Name of the grid model.DTM
7.9.1.3 Winfrog Format

This is standard single-beam data in Winfrog format and cannot be edited
in PDS2000. Single beam data can also be logged in PDS2000 Format
and edited in the standard PDS2000 editors.
File name: Runline name-day-time.RAW.
7.9.1.4 Simrad EM3000 Format

An industry accepted standard format for multibeam data. Raw data files
in this format can be processed with HDCS cleaning software.
File name: Vessel name_runline name_date_time_RAW.ALL
7.9.1.5 Cleaned XYZ Data

The file is a space separated XYZ file in ASCII format.
The data is filtered according the criteria of the sensor computation. A
further reduction is possible for every swath of the multibeam data.
Figure 7-28 Cleaned XYZ logging reduction in the Logging page
The tolerance is the minimum difference of the Z-value with the previous
Z-value. If the difference is more than the tolerance (e.g. 0.05 m) the data
point is added to the file.
The width of a sway is defined as 100%. By setting a minimum distance
(e.g. 10%) a point at every 10% of the width of the sway is added to the
file.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XYZ

7.9.1.6 Production Format
A grid model with production data from the device driver ‘Dredge
Production’.
Figure 7-29 Grid model input for the production
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS2000 Grid Model (see page
119).
File name: Name of the Grid Model.DTM
7.9.1.7 Dredge Track Format

This file logged the position of the drag head(s). The calculated position
comes from the device driver computation ‘Absolute Dredge Head
Computation’.
Figure 7-30 Dredge track sampling rate
By setting the sampling rate the logging interval is defined (e.g. 30 sec).
File name: Vessel name[application type]_year_month_day.TRK
7.9.1.8 DXF Format

This format is only available with the application type ‘Barsweep’. Each
time the event button is pressed, the location and the size of the bar plus
the direction of sailing is logged in the DXF file.
Figure 7-31 File name for the DXF file
File name: File name.DXF
7.9.1.9 XTF Format

The XTF (eXtended Triton Format) format is only available for multibeam
applications and can contain multibeam, side scan and/or snippets data.
Click on to go through the settings of XTF format. See for a
detailed explanation of the XTF settings in the chapter ‘Export’ on page
620.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XTF

The XTF_HEADER_POSITION record is mentioned in XTF
documentation but it is not explained. Below this record will be explained.
Byte aligned structure of XTF_HEADER_POSITION:

typedef struct
{
WORD MagicNumber; // Set to 0xFACE
BYTE HeaderType; // XTF_HEADER_POSITION (100)
BYTE SubChannelNumber; // Unused. Set to 0.
WORD NumChansToFollow; // Unused. Set to 0.
WORD Reserved1[2]; // Unused. Set to 0.
DWORD NumBytesThisRecord; // Must be 64.
DWORD ID; // Unique id for this sensor. In case
// multiple GPS are used in survey.
DWORD TimeTag; // Millisecond timetag.
double PositionX; // X position as reported by GPS
// (Easting(meters) or
// Longitude(degrees))
double PositionY; // Y position as reported by GPS
// (Northing(meters) or
// Latitude(degrees))
double PositionZ; // Z position as reported by GPS
// (always meters)
BYTE IsHeightUsed; // 0 = Z not used.
// 1 = Z is used (RTK).
BYTE TypeUnits; // Applies to PositionX and PositionY
// above. 0 = lat/lon, 1 = E/N.
BYTE Reserved2[16]; // Unused. Set to 0.
} XTFPOSITIONDATA;
7.9.1.10 Backscatter Grid Model

A grid model where next to the depth an extra layer is added for the
backscatter data (the intensity) of the side scan sonar or snippets data.
Figure 7-32 Grid model input for backscatter grid model logging
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS2000 Grid Model (see page
119) but with an extra layer for the backscatter data.
The old backscatter grid models (created with the Sidescan sonar format
 in the PDS2000 versions before 3.4.0.0) can still be used for logging the
side scan sonar or snippets data). Only in these old grid models is no Z
Average available to show the data in a 3D view.
File name: Name of the Grid Model [Backscatter-Model].DTM

7.9.1.11 S7K Format
This format is only available for a multibeam application with a RESON
SeaBat 7K system and can contain multibeam, side scan sonar and/or
snippets data.
Figure 7-33 7K logging reduction
Check the option Reduce on nadir filter if not all the data has to be
logged. The data that is rejected by the nadir filter (see page 328) will not
be logged.
Figure 7-34 Backup log in the logging page for S7K format
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 59). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the S7K file also in the backup log directory as
specified in the Project Configuration.
At the moment the following records, if available, will be logged:
1003 - Position
The position is the position of the vessel reference point.
The height is the height of the vessel reference point
relative to sea level when height source is ‘None’,
otherwise the height is relative to chart datum.
1008 - Depth
Depth of the vessel reference point relative to sea level.
1010 - 7K Sound Velocity Profile
1015 - Navigation
The position is the position of the vessel reference point.
The height is the height of the vessel reference point
relative to sea level when height source is ‘None’,
otherwise the height is relative to chart datum.
1016 - Attitude
7000 - 7K Volatile Sonar Settings
7004 - 7K Beam Geometry
7006 - 7K Bathymetry Data
The along track and across track values are related to the
vessel reference point and not to the sonar reference
point. The depths are relative sea level when the height
source is ‘None’, otherwise the depths are relative chart
datum.
7007 - 7K Backscatter Image Data (Side Scan Data)
7008 - 7K Beam Data (Snippets Data)
7009 - Vertical Depth
7027 - 7K Bathymetry Data new style
The along track and across track values are related to the
vessel reference point and not to the sonar reference
point. The depths are relative sea level when the height
source is ‘None’, otherwise the depths are relative chart
datum.
7028 - 7K Beam Data dB (Snippets Data)

7030 - Sonar Installation Parameters
7057 - 7K Backscatter Image Data dB (Calibrated Side Scan
Data)
7058 - 7K Beam Data dB (Calibrated Snippets Data)
7200 - 7K File Header
File name: Date_time.s7k
7.9.1.12 SDS Format

The SDS (Self Defining Structure) format will be available for multibeam
applications and is special made to collect large amount of multibeam
data. Click on to open the SDS settings. Next to the SDS file a
CTL file will be created with a format that is depending on the selections
made in the SDS settings. See for a detailed explanation of the SDS
settings and the CTL file formats the chapter ‘Export’ on page 622.
File name: Vessel name_runline name-date-time(1).SDS
The number 1 mentioned the first multibeam system from the equipment
list. If more multibeam systems are logged simultaneously then the
second gets a 2, the third a 3, etc.
7.9.1.13 Interval Logging Format

The interval logging format is available for all applications. In the Tools
page (see page 111) the interval logging has to be enable and specified
before any data can be logged in the interval logging file, which will be
one file for each day.
File name: Vessel name_Interval.log-date.CSV
7.9.1.14 FAU Format

The FAU (FArvandsvæsenets Utm) format from the Danish Hydrographic
Office is available for the multibeam applications and will contain only
multibeam data. The raw multibeam data, that means unfiltered, will be
logged in the FAU file.
The FAU logging is available in two formats where one field can be beam
angle or beam number.
Figure 7-35 FAU 1 or FAU 2 format for the FAU logging
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.FAU
When the number of beams is changed during the logging the actual file
will be closed and a new FAU file will be created. In a FAU file the number
of beams is placed in the header of the file.
At the moment some fields in the header of the file are not filled in due to
 varies reasons. The fields that are not filled are TimeOffset,
SensorValsEdited, SwathNtPosJump, MaxNonLinearity, Major, Minor,
Autoflags, RotRectValid and BB_Tilt. All these fields will have a value 0.

 The FAU format is made for UTM projections, but in PDS2000 all different
projections will be accepted. The header for the field
Minilab[MAXLABLNG] will have normally the UTM zone and the satellite
ellipsoid mentioned, like ‘#utm32nNwgs84’ for UTM Zone 32 and
WGS’84.
 For non UTM projections the field will be empty, except for the places
which are restricted. The field will look like ‘# N’.
7.9.1.15 GSF Format

The GSF (Generic Sensor Format) format is designed to efficiently store
and exchange information produced by geophysical measurement
systems, particularly for data sets created by systems such as multibeam
echosounders.
The GSF logging is available for the multibeam applications and can
contain uncorrected or corrected multibeam data from RESON SeaBat 7K
and RESON SeaBat 8K. The multibeam data will be logged in the GSF
file.
Figure 7-36 Uncorrected or fully corrected multibeam data selection for the
GSF logging
Select Uncorrected when the raw multibeam data has to be logged in the
GSF file. Select Fully Corrected when the corrected multibeam data has
to be logged in the GSF file. The corrected multibeam data in the GSF file
is computed according the multibeam xyz computation in the multibeam
device data.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.GSF
Below is a short explanation of the current implementation of GSF File
Logging in PDS2000:
 The GSF logging is based on a modified version of the GSF 2.09
library provided by SAIC.
 The logger uses CF_MBXYZREL PDS data blocks as a starting point.
 Only fully computed results are stored in the GSF File.
 Sonar specific data is only written for sonar models: 8101, 8111, 8124,
8125, 8150 and 8160.
 Multi-head sonar data is logged into two separate GSF files.
 Single beam sonar’s are not supported.
The following GSF types are written to the GSF file:
 GSF header
 GSF Processing Parameters
 GSF Sensor Parameters
 GSF Comment
 GSF MB Ping
 GSF Attitude

 GSF Ping Summary
For the GSF MB Ping record the following fields are written to the GSF
file:
 depth
 across_track
 along_track
 travel_time
 quality_flags
 beam_flags
 vertical_error
 horizontal_error
7.9.2 Log Space Management

PDS2000 has some possibilities to keep an eye on the amount of logged
data.
Figure 7-37 Log space management
System required free disk space

This is 1% of the system disk and cannot be changed.
Next to the settings below an automatic free disk space system is also
 in place. The checks for that system are 1% on the system disk with a
minimum of 500 MB and 100 MB on the data disk.
The logging will stop when one of these two limits is reached. One
 hour, 30 minutes and 15 minutes before these limits are reached a
message will be reported.
Minimum free disk space warning
Give the amount of disk space that should be kept free at all times, in
MB.
Allowed log space warning
The maximum space to be used by PDS2000 for logging purpose, in
MB.
The log space management system is not active when the minimum free
disk space and/or the allowed log space are zero.
PDS2000 will generate a warning signal when the limit for the minimum
free disk space or the allowed log space is reached and it will continue to
log the data.

7.9.3 Condition Check
Logging can take place under selectable conditions. When that is required
activate the Condition check and check the wanted conditions. Logging
will be suspended when one of the conditions is true.
Figure 7-38 Logging conditions
Guidance online condition

The offtrack limit which is set in the runlines page of the guidance (see
page 138). PDS2000 stops logging when the offtrack exceeds the limit
value.
Inside clipping polygon
PDS2000 logs only when the vessel is inside a polygon. Choose a
polygon from the selection window. The clipping polygons can be
created in the Explorer (see page 224).
No user alarms
When one of the conditions of the alarms set in the configuration is
active, PDS2000 stops with logging. The alarms can be set in the
configuration (see page 69) and in the vessel configuration (see page
129).
User conditions
Click on and set a condition (the same menu as on page 104)
which stops the logging in PDS2000.
7.9.4 Create New Log File

PDS2000 allows the user to define when a new log file has to be created.
Figure 7-39 Create new log file
A maximum size of the log file can be set. This means that when the file
exceeds the file size a new log file will be created.
Another option is by setting a time limit on logging in one file. If the time
limit is reached a new log file will be created.

7.10 Simulation
Figure 7-40 Simulation page in the vessel configuration
On this page the simulation parameters can be set. The simulator is build-
in for training purposes.
Vessel position
Enter the grid position where the simulator will start.
Heading
The initial heading of the vessel.
Vru
Maximum values of the VRU simulator, Max. Heave in project units,
Max. Roll and Max. Pitch in degrees.
Depth
For each channel a depth value. Depth channel 1 is also used to
simulate a multibeam echo sounder.
Speed
Initial speed of the vessel. Depending on the chosen project units, in
knots or meters/second.
Simulate using runlines
Check Use Runlines to have the simulator running over the runlines.
Check Automatic Mode and the simulator will select the next runline
automatically.
Multibeam noise factor
Adds noise to the simulated multibeam swath, giving a more realistic
effect.

7.11 Aliases
Figure 7-41 Alias page in the vessel configuration with an alias for NMEA
GGA
Aliases are used to give multiple sensors of the same type distinguished
names. E.g. when there are two GPS sensors both using the device
driver ‘Standard NMEA GGA’, these sensors will have the same name in
the program. To give those sensors aliases such as ‘GPS1’ and ‘GPS2’ it
is more clear to the user.
Aliases are used throughout PDS2000 wherever the device name comes
forward.

7.12 Alarms
Figure 7-42 Alarms page in the vessel configuration
The alarms that can be set in this page are vessel specific or device
specific alarms and will be valid only for the vessel that is setup in this
vessel configuration.
7.12.1 Vessel Alarms

Click on to create a new alarm file for the vessel and click on
to edit the selected alarm file. In both cases the Alarms window
will be opened where alarms can be added, edited, removed or renamed.
Figure 7-43 Alarms window with an alarm
Click on to edit the selected alarm or on to add a new

alarm. In both cases the Conditions window will be opened where the
alarm can be modified, the sound alarm can be set and the severity can
be selected.

Figure 7-44 Conditions window with an alarm
Check the option Enable Alarm when the alarm has to be active.
Check the option Sound Alarm when the alarm should give a sound when
the alarm becomes valid. Each Severity (Low, Intermediate or High) gives
a different sound for the alarm.
With or a Condition dialog will be opened where the
selected condition can be modified or added. In this dialog an attribute
from the equipment or computation list can be selected and a condition
with a value for this attribute can be defined.
Figure 7-45 Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an

attribute can be selected
The vessel alarm file will be placed in the ‘Explorer - Project’ (see page
 219), but cannot be edited through the explorer. It is only possible to
modify a vessel alarm file in the vessel configuration.
7.12.2 Device Alarms

When in the Equipment list the IXSEA OCTANS TAH device driver is
selected as Compass and/or as Attitude device then several device
alarms will be added to the Alarms.
In these drivers status values are available to check the quality of the
data. For each data item a status flag is available and therefore the status
flag can be used as a check. For the attitude device driver four device
alarms will be added and for the compass device driver two.
With each device alarm can be modified. The same windows and
dialogs are available as describe above in the vessel alarms.

8 Guidance
8.1 Introduction
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks, towards a pre-defined target or in/out pre-defined areas.
The number of guidance methods available in PDS2000 depends on the
application type that is selected. At the moment the different guidance
methods shown below are available through the different application
types:
1. Route (see page 132). A route is a sequence of points connected
with lines. The lines are straight lines between tangent points, or
circle segments when a center point is given. Routes are often used
in rivers and channels, but can also be used to follow a pipe or a
cable.
2. Runlines (see page 138). Runlines are straight lines or route wing
lines which can be grouped in blocks. A number of block methods are
available.
3. Waypoints (see page 141). A waypoint is a location towards the
vessel is moving.
4. Design Model (see page 143). A selection can be made between a
3D model and a grid model as guidance for dredging.
5. Cutter Dredge (see page 146). A work route for a cutter dredger.
6. Work Areas (see page 147). A work area is an area where the work
takes place. A work area can be a rectangle or a polygon area.
7. Restricted Areas (see page 148). A restricted area is an area where
it is not allowed to come or work. A restricted area can be a polygon
or an area on both sides of a route (e.g. a pipe or a cable route).
8. Vessel Placement (see page 149). A vessel placement is a location
with a heading towards the vessel is moving.
9. Dredge Instruction (see page 151). A dredge instruction gives the
dredge area with the depths for the dredger.
10. Object Distance (see page 152). Generate alarms when distance to
selected object become in alarm range.
Each method has its own definitions and computations and can have
many guidance files. In the Acquisition the user can change from
guidance file.
PDS2000 - User Manual Guidance  131

8.2 Route
Figure 8-1 Route page in the guidance
When a new route is created the user can select from three different
types of route; a generic route, a pipe route or a cable route. The generic
route is the standard route with Eastings and Northings. The pipe / cable
route has next to the Eastings and Northings also a Z-value or a depth.
This way a pipe / cable route can be used to show a pipe / cable with the
right depth.
The route editor can also A route is a number of points connected by lines. The route points can be
be opened in the Explorer - either tangent points (TG) or center points (CP). Tangent points can be
Project with the Track connected with a straight line or with a curve.
Guidance Routes option
(see in the ‘Project On the route page a route file can be selected and edited or a new file
Database’ on page 223). can be created. This opens automatically the route editor.
132  Guidance PDS2000 - User Manual

8.2.1 Route Editor
Figure 8-2 Route editor
Click on to add a new point to the route or click on to

insert a new point on the location of the cursor in the list. The details of
that new point are displayed in the upper right corner of the route editor.
Name
A name can be given to a tangent point. This name will be listed and
shown in the view.
Type
The two types are ‘TANGENT’ and ‘CENTERPOINT’. If ‘TANGENT’ is
selected it is possible to give a name to that point.
or
With ‘Auto KP’ the KP value for the added or inserted point will be
calculated automatically.
With ‘Manual KP’ the user has to give the KP value for the added or
inserted point.
Enter the coordinates; several coordinate types can be used. The

latitude and longitude are on the local or satellite ellipsoid; depends on
the selection in the project configuration (see page 62).
Lat/Lon (º) Latitude/Longitude in degrees.
Lat/Lon (º ’) Latitude/Longitude in degrees and minutes.
Lat/Lon (º ’ ”) Latitude/Longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds.
X/Y Grid coordinates.

Pipe Z
The pipe / cable depth for the entered coordinates.
When a center point is selected the following options are added to the
editor:
Radius
The radius of the curve.
Automatic
PDS2000 can compute either the coordinates of the center point or the
radius.
None. The coordinates and the radius have to be entered by the user.
Center. The user has to enter the radius and PDS2000 computes the
coordinates.
Radius. The user has to enter the coordinates and PDS2000
computes the radius.
For the curves PDS2000 needs two adjacent tangent points to determine
the direction of the curve.
To check the fit of the curve against its adjacent tangent points. In
case a curve fit is not possible warnings are written in the ‘Status’ field
of the list.
From the menu bar some extra functions can be selected:
Route > Properties…
Figure 8-3 Route Properties for the standard route (left) and for the pipe /
cable route (right)
Start KP
Enter a Start KP for the (pipe / cable) route.
Pipe Diameter
Enter a pipe / cable diameter for the pipe / cable route.
KP calculation mode
Select the mode for the KP calculation, Grid distance or True
distance.
Grid distance. Calculate a distance between two tangent points on
the Easting – Northing plane.
True distance. Calculate a distance between two tangent points on
the local ellipsoid.
First curve turn
Select the direction of the first curve in the route, Clockwise or
Counter clockwise.
Manual KP handling
When a tangent point on the route is defined with a manual KP, this
option becomes valid.

Allows gaps. The KP value on the line segment between the two
tangent points is calculated from the first tangent point onwards. It
is possible that at the end of the line segment the calculated KP
does not match with the manual KP value of the second tangent
point.
Non metric route. The KP value on the line segment between the
two tangent points is interpolated between the two points. At the
end of the line segment the interpolated KP match the KP value of
the second tangent point.
Route > Import
An ASCII import wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings (see for more detail the ‘ASCII Import Wizard’ on page
136).
The manual KP values should
be in km. To import the KP values as manual KP’s an extra column with the
value ‘1’ should be made in the ASCII file, a ‘0’ mean that the KP value
 in the import file is not a manual KP. Select then in the import wizard
‘KP’ for the KP column and ‘Man KP’ for the column with ‘1’.
Route > Export
An ASCII file with the route information will be created.
Figure 8-4 Example of an exported route
Options > Electronic Chart…

Select a PDS1000 electronic chart as background.
Options > Grid Properties…
Select the grid to be shown in the plan view: Grid Crosses, Solid Line
Grid, Dotted Line Grid or Scale Bar. The grid can be with or without a
grid annotation.
When the cursor is on the plan view, its coordinates are displayed in the
window below the zoom buttons. Right clicking on the plan view window
opens a context menu with the zoom functions.

8.2.2 ASCII Import Wizard
The ASCII import wizard in the route editor can be opened with Route >
Import from the menu bar of the route editor (see above).
Figure 8-5 First page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route
If an import configuration The ASCII file with the route information has to be selected. If the file is
file is used, click on selected the user can use an existing import configuration file or continue
to import the with the wizard to configure the import. If the user continues with the
ASCII file. wizard there is a possibility to save the import configuration file, so the
next time the configuration file can be used to import a route. Click on
to continue with the import wizard.
Figure 8-6 Second page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route
Select the file type for the ASCII import file; the data in the file is delimited
with a character (like a comma, a tab, a space or user defined) or the data
is presented in fixed columns. Click on to go to the last page of
the import wizard.

Figure 8-7 Last page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route
On the last page of the import wizard the delimiter and the columns have
to be defined.
Delimiter
Select a character as delimiter between the data columns. The options
are comma, tab, space or custom. With custom a user defined
character can be added.
Extra
The extra option is used to skip the header lines of the ASCII import
file. First check the option before a number can be filled in.
Select Column Names
Click with the right mouse button on a column and select one of the
available field names for the selected column. On the right top side of
the page a column number will be added to the selected field name.
If the right delimiter is selected, the right number of header lines is
skipped and all the columns are selected, which are needed for the route,
click on to import the ASCII file.
If on the first page of the import wizard the options ‘Save configuration as’
is checked and a file name is given, the settings made on the second and
third page of the wizard will be saved in the import configuration file and
can be used the next time when an ASCII import for a route has to be
done.

8.3 Runlines
Figure 8-8 Runlines page in the guidance
The runlines editor can A runline can be a straight line or a route wing line. It is possible to have
also be opened in the several groups of runlines in a runlines file.
Explorer - Project with the
Runlines option (see in the On the runlines page a runlines file can be selected and edited or a new
‘Project Database’ on page file can be created. This will automatically open the runlines editor (see
222). page 139).
Lead-in Lines
When the option Show lead-in lines is checked, PDS2000 computes a
lead-in line from the current vessel position to the start point of the
next runline. The lead-in curve is based on the lead-in line length and
the ‘Vessel turn radius’ as set in the vessel geometry (see page 93).
The lead-in line length is the length of the straight line that is in line
with the next runline.
Check Use lead-in lines to compute off-line distances; distance to go
and traveled distances along the lead-in line.
Next line selection
In the next line selection the runline retrieval method needs to be set.
Normal. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the coordinates as defined in the runlines file.
Reverse. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the end and start coordinates.
Alternate. Each time a next line is selected from the list, the start and
end coordinates are alternately as normal or reversed. This allows
sailing line-by-line in a continuous way.
Enter or choose a number of lines to skip each time a next line is taken
automatically.
Check the option Automatic next line and click on to set a
condition to discard the current line and goes to the next runline in the
list. The condition editor is equal to the one described on page 104.
Online condition
This condition is used for logging purposes. Check the Offtrack limit
and give a value for the offtrack limit. When a vessel is further away
from the selected runline than the offtrack limit, logging stops if the
appropriate check marks are set in the ‘Condition Check’ in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration (see page 126).

8.3.1 Runlines Editor
Figure 8-9 Runlines editor
For each runlines file one or more line types can be defined in this editor.
For blocks of lines the first line is entered and the computation of the
coordinates for the other lines is done automatically.
Click on under the ‘Full Name’ to create a new set of runlines.
Select from the Add Runline window a runline type to add. Each selection
gets a different line entry window on the bottom left-hand side of the
runlines editor.
Single line (rectangular)
Enter a line name, a line number and the start and end coordinates.
Single line (polar)
Enter a line name, a line number, the start coordinates and a line
length and bearing to the end coordinates.
Parallel lines (rectangular)
Enter a name for the runlines, the start and end coordinates for the
first line, a start number for the first line, the number of lines, the
number interval and the line spacing (= the distance between adjacent
lines).
Parallel lines (polar)
As above but instead of end coordinates for the first line a line length
and bearing to the end coordinates.
Grid
Enter a name for the runlines, choose an origin where the grid box
starts, the coordinates of the origin, the width and height of the grid
box and a rotation for the grid box.
Enter the start numbers, the number interval and the line spacing for in
the X and Y direction of the grid box.
Perpendicular lines
Creates a block of lines perpendicular to a centerline.
Enter a name for the runlines, for the centerline the start and end

coordinates or the length and the bearing to the end coordinates.
Enter a start number, the number interval, the line spacing and the line
length for the left and right side of the centerline.
Route Crosslines
Creates a block of lines perpendicular to a route.
Enter a name for the runlines and select the file name of an existing
route. Under the selection of the route comes a message ‘Center line
is correct’. If the route is not correct then the route cannot be used for
the crosslines. The next fields show ‘Route info’ in the form of the first
and last KP of the selected route.
Select a part of the route where the cross lines should be generated by
entering a start and end KP on the route.
Enter the start number for the runlines, the number interval, the line
spacing and the line length for the left and right side of the route.
Route Winglines
Creates a block of lines parallel to a route.
Enter a name for the runlines and select the file name of an existing
route. Under the selection of the route comes a message ‘Center line
is correct’. If the route is not correct then the route cannot be used for
the winglines. The next fields show ‘Route info’ in the form of the first
and last KP of the selected route.
Select a part of the route where the winglines should be generated by
entering a start and end KP on the route.
Enter for the left and the right side of the route the start numbers, the
number intervals, the line spacing and the number of lines.
Fan Shaped lines
Creates a set of lines which are all rotated around the start coordinates
of the first line.
Enter the name for the runlines. For the first line enter the start
coordinates and either the end coordinates or the length and bearing
to the end coordinates.
Enter the start number, the number of lines, the number interval and
the step angle for the rotation.
Multiple runlines
A set of individual straight lines that have no relation with each other.
Enter a name for the runlines and add an individual line by entering a
line name and the start and end coordinates.
Saltpan runlines
Creates a block of straight parallel lines where the first line is between
the start of both selected routes (side B) or between the end of both
routes (side A). The offset is the offset of the first from the line
between the starts or ends of the routes. Enter a step interval for the
distance between two parallel lines.
Click on to start the ASCII import wizard. With the import wizard
multiple runlines can be imported in the runlines editor. Every line in the
ASCII file should have a name; otherwise the runlines editor cannot
recognize the line. See ‘ASCII Import Wizard’ on page 136 for more
details about the functionality.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with several
functions. The most of these functions are also in the toolbar.
Zoom functions ( )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window, Zoom Extents and Zoom to the
selected runline.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse

button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Measure ( )
Measure a distance by clicking on one location and move the cursor to
the other location.
Add Runline
Draw a line between two points. Automatically a runline is created.
When a runline of more than two points is drawn, PDS2000
automatically creates a route file and the runline becomes a wing line
of that route with a line spacing of 0.
Draw Route
Draw a route and PDS2000 will ask for the route file name.
Save User Defaults
The settings of the runlines editor created by the user will be saved.
Layer Control ( )
The background and foreground layers that are used in the runlines
editor. New layers can be added to the editor.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model that can be added in the view (see page
361).
Properties ( )
The background color can be modified and the option Zoom to
Selection can be enabled/disabled.
All the attributes of the selected layers of the Layer Control are
available.
8.4 Waypoints
Figure 8-10 Waypoints page in the guidance
The waypoints editor can Waypoints are target points or points of interest. Around a waypoint
also be opened in the tolerance circles can be drawn. In the Acquisition a wayline can be drawn
Explorer - Project with the from the current vessel position to a waypoint, indicating distance and
Waypoints option (see in bearing from the vessel to the waypoint.
the ‘Project Database’ on
page 224). On the waypoints page a waypoints file can be selected and edited or a
new file can be created. This will automatically open the waypoints editor.

8.4.1 Waypoints Editor
Figure 8-11 Waypoints editor
Click on to add a new waypoint to the list. The details of the new
waypoint are displayed in the upper right corner of the waypoints editor.
Name
Enter a logical name for the waypoint. By default the name will be the
‘Waypoint’ with between brackets the date and time when it was
created.

Z
A high can be entered for the waypoint. When for instance a waypoint
is on the bottom then a negative high can be entered and the waypoint
will be displayed on the bottom in a 3D view.
Tolerance
Tolerance 1 and 2 are circles around the waypoint. They will give an
idea about the distance between the vessel and the waypoint when
the vessel comes close to the waypoint.

Waypoint > Properties
Figure 8-12 Waypoint Properties in the waypoints editor
Default tolerances can be set. For a new waypoint the user defined
tolerances in the top right corner are replaced by the default tolerances
set in here.
grid annotation.
Options > Import from ASCII…
An ASCII Import Wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings. This import wizard is the same type of import wizard
as discussed on page 136. The ASCII file should contain at least a
waypoint name, the X and Y co-ordinate. The two tolerance circles are
optional.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with the
zoom functions, which are also on the right side in the editor.
8.5 Design Model
Figure 8-13 Design Model page in the guidance

The 3D design model A design model is often used as reference for a maximum dredge depth.
editor and the grid model In PDS2000 two different model types can be used: 3D Models or Grid
editor can also be opened Models.
in the Explorer - Project
with the 3D Models or the On the Design Model page a model type and a model file can be selected
Grid Models option (see in or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the 3D design
the’ Project Database’ on model editor (see below) or the grid model editor (see page 508).
page 219 or on page 221).
Offset
When checked, an offset perpendicular to the design model will be
applied.
Z Shift
When checked, an offset to the Z-value of the design model will be
applied.
Z lower limit
When checked, the new Z-value for the design model.
Underdredge limit
The value is an offset perpendicular to the design model and is shown
in the different Profile – Realtime Design views just as an indication
(see ‘Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View’ on page 367). At the
moment no alarm is set or checks are done with this limit.
Overdredge limit
Same as for the ‘Underdredge Limit’.
8.5.1 3D Design Model Editor
Figure 8-14 3D Design Model editor
In the 3D design model editor data can be imported, checked and

exported. There are three types of data that can be imported:
DXF
A 3D-DXF file made with e.g. AutoCAD can be converted to a 3D
model.
There are some restrictions to the DXF file: no blocks, no circles or

circle segments and remove the text if possible. PDS2000 works with
straight lines and every point should have an X, Y and Z value.
Profile Design Model
Convert a profile design model to a 3D model.
Clipping Polygon
Select a clipping polygon and enter a Z-value to create a 3D model
inside the clipping polygon.
PDS2000 will check every imported file automatically. An already existing
3D model can be checked by clicking on .
When a file is checked and everything is OK the message in the info box
should look like as shown above in the example of the 3D design model
editor.
If data is checked and there are errors the info box looks like:
Figure 8-15 A checked 3D model with errors
After the check the errors are visible in the plan view of the editor. Zoom
in to one of the errors and click on the error to open a Fix window to solve
the error. After the error is fixed, click on again to check if the error
is gone. Continue to solve all the errors. Click on or to save
the model, this is only possible when there are no errors left. As
mentioned in the info box the non-flat and overlapping areas cannot be
fixed.
If an error is fixed but the result is not what the user wants then with
the modification made to the error can be undone.
The 3D model can be exported to a 3D-DXF file. When it is not possible
to solve all the errors in the model, like the non-flat and overlapping
areas, the only option is to export the data to a DXF file and try to solve
the errors outside PDS2000 e.g. in AutoCAD.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with several
functions. The most of these functions are also in the toolbar.
Zoom functions ( )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.

Measure ( )
Measure a distance by clicking on one location and move the cursor to
the other location.
Save User Defaults
The settings of the 3D design model editor created by the user will be
saved.
Layer Control ( )
The background and foreground layers that are used in the 3D design
model editor.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model that can be added in the view (see
pagexxx).
Properties ( )
The background color of the view can be modified.
All the attributes of the selected layers of the Layer Control are
available.
8.6 Cutter Dredge
Figure 8-16 Cutter Dredge page in the guidance
The route editor can also A cutter dredger uses a work route as guidance. A work route is the same
be opened in the Explorer - as a route in ‘Route’ on page 132.
Project with the Track
Guidance Routes option Work route
(see in the ‘Project On the cutter dredge page a (work) route file can be selected and
Database’ on page 223). edited or a new file can be created. This opens automatically the route
editor (see page 133).
Work offset
An offset can be given to the work route. This offset route becomes
then the guidance route for the cutter dredger.
Swing limits
Angular swing limits
The maximum swing of the cutter to port and starboard side in
degrees.
Use also distance limits
Check this option to make it active.

The maximum distance from the cutter to the center line on port and
starboard side.
Prewarning distance end of cut
The distance from the end of cut (distance limits) from where a
warning is generated.
8.7 Work Areas
Figure 8-17 Work Areas page in the guidance
A work area can be a dredge or dump area, and each area has a name
that can be descriptive and shown in the plan view.
With the option Only allow In the Acquisition one or more work areas can be selected and becomes
single area selected in the the active work area(s). A line is drawn from the current vessel position to
Acquisition only one work the active work area or the center of active work areas. That line stays on
area can be selected and the vessel’s tracking point while the vessel moves, guiding the vessel
will be active. toward the active work area.
The work areas editor can A work areas file can be selected or created with . Different work
also be opened in the areas can be kept together in one work areas file in the work areas editor.
Explorer - Project with the There is no limit to the number of areas in one file.
Work Areas option (see in
the ‘Project Database’ on Click on to create a new work area. Two work area types are
page 224). available:
Polygon Area
Select an existing clipping polygon from the project as work area.
Rectangular Area
Enter a name, the center coordinate, the width, the height and the
rotation of the work area.
Alternatively, work areas can be created by importing ASCII files, click on
and converts these files to work areas. The ASCII file should be a
comma separated file with the format <Name>, <Center X>, <Center Y>,
<Length>, <Width>, <Rotation>.

8.8 Restricted Areas
Figure 8-18 Restricted Areas page in the guidance
Restricted areas are areas where dredging is forbidden or are dangerous.

Such an area can be enclosed in a polygon, or it can be a route with a
certain tolerance (width). Route areas are often pipelines, cables etc.
The restricted areas editor Restricted areas are kept together in files. A restricted areas file can hold
can also be opened in the multiple areas; each area is either a polygon or a route. All areas of the
Explorer - Project with the current file are valid in the Acquisition.
Restricted Areas option
(see in the ‘Project On the restricted areas page a restricted area file can be selected and
Database’ on page 222). edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
restricted areas editor.
8.8.1 Restricted Areas Editor
Figure 8-19 Restricted Areas editor
To create a new area click on and select as restricted area a

polygon or a route with a tolerance. The polygon or route should exist in
the project.
In the tab Options, options can be set for action when a vessel is inside a
restricted area:
 Highlight the area when the vessel is inside.
 Generate an alarm when the vessel is inside the restricted area.

 Additional Positions. An offset position computation that triggers the
alarm. E.g. in case the tracking offset point is used, the bulk of the
vessel can already be inside the restricted area before the alarm is
triggered. Then, an advanced or user computation ‘Offset Position’ can
be set on another point on the vessel, f.i. the bow. If this computation
is added as an additional position, alarm trigger occurs the moment
this offset point enters the restricted area.
The Advanced tab has additional possibilities for the restricted areas.
 A data condition can be set. The alarm is triggered in case this
condition is met.
 Advanced actions are: Highlight area in plan view, Generate alarm and
Trigger Output.
 Advanced actions take place when the (offset point on the) vessel is
inside or outside the area.
8.9 Vessel Placement
Figure 8-20 Vessel Placement page in the guidance
The placement points A vessel placement is a target location with a heading. In the Acquisition
editor can also be opened a line will be drawn from the current vessel position to a placement point,
in the Explorer - Project indicating distance and bearing from the vessel to the placement point.
with the Placement Points
option (see in the ‘Project On the vessel placement page a placement point file can be selected and
Database’ on page 222). edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
placement points editor.

8.9.1 Placement Points Editor
Figure 8-21 Placement Points editor
Click on to add a new placement point to the list. The details of

the new point are displayed in the upper right corner of the placement
points editor.
Name
Enter a logical name for the placement point.

Heading
The heading for the vessel when it arrives at the placement point
location.
grid annotation.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with the
zoom functions, which are also on the right side in the editor.

8.10 Dredge Instruction
Figure 8-22 Dredge Instruction page in the guidance
This option is only available for one specific client.

The dredge instruction A dredge instruction is an instruction for the dredger where all related
editor can also be opened data and information is defined. The dredge location will be set by
in the Explorer - Project selecting a dredge polygon.
with the Dredge
Instructions option (see in On the dredge instruction page an existing instruction can be edited or a
the ‘Project Database’ on new one can be created. In both cases automatically the dredge
page 221). instruction editor will be opened.
8.10.1 Dredge Instruction Editor
Figure 8-23 Dredge Instruction Editor
On the left side of the dredge instruction editor all the information can be
added or modified. This information will be shown directly in the plan view
on the right side.

Grid model
The grid model that will be shown the actual situation at the dredge
area.
3D design model
The 3D model that will be used in the dredge area.
Dredge depth offset
It is possible, by giving an offset to the 3D model, to dredge to an other
depth as specified in the 3D model.
Dredge polygon
The dredge polygon is the area where has to be dredged. A new
dredge polygon can be created through the context menu of the plan
view.
Create grid model update
A dredge instruction can be send to a vessel with all the information as
given in the instruction, that means also the data. The file size of a grid
model can be very large. To avoid sending every time the whole grid
model only the data of the grid model inside the dredge polygon will be
send.
Historical vessel tracks
The tracks from several vessels can be shown in the plan view and will
be send to the vessel.
Description
A description of the dredge instruction.
Class
One of the four classes for the quality of the dredge material can be
specified.
Disposal location
The location where the dredge material has to be dumped.
When the user is finished with the dredge instruction the instruction can
be saved and send later or send directly to the vessel.
8.11 Object Distance
Figure 8-24 Object Distance page in the guidance
 This option is available for the (rope) excavator and grab crane dredge
applications will only work when 3D shapes of the crane are used.

PDS2000 can generate alarms to warn the user when he is too close to
an object. The object can be selected as a DXF file in this page.
In the Object Distance page two alarms can be defined. Add a distance
for which the alarm becomes valid and enter a text that will be displayed
in the Acquisition. In the Profile – Realtime Design view and Plan View –
General Dredge Operation when the alarm becomes valid the frame will
be highlighted (grey or red) and the added text will be displayed in the
frame (see below).
Figure 8-25 Views in the Acquisition that have an alarm frame with text

9 Events
9.1 Introduction
Before events can be viewed in the Messages – System Messages view
in the Acquisition, the event and the conditions to show the event have to
be defined. At the same time when an event is shown in the Messages –
System Messages view the information is logged in the PDS2000 log file.
The Events page can be opened in two different ways:
1. Through the New Project wizard. Select File > New Project… from the
menu bar of the Control Center to open the wizard (see page 68).
2. With Acquisition > Configure from the menu bar or with on the
toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window will be opened.
Click on the tab Events to open the Events page.
9.2 Events Mode
Figure 9-1 Mode page of the Events page
On this page the eventing interval, the conditions and the event definition
have to be set.
The option Enable eventing has to be checked if the user wants events in
the Acquisition.
When the option Follow Logging Enable is checked the event logging is
started and stopped with the PDS2000 logging. This option overrules the
PDS2000 - User Manual Events  155

option Enable eventing. When the Acquisition is started and the option
Enable eventing is checked the event logging is started even if the
PDS2000 logging is off, but when the PDS2000 logging is started and
stopped the event logging follows the PDS2000 logging.
For each day an event logfile is generated with the information as defined
in the event definition (see page 156).
The name of the event logfile is ‘Acquisition_EVENT_yyyymmdd.log’.
9.2.1 Mode
Select one of the three interval modes for the eventing:
Time
Set a time interval, e.g. 60 sec. Every 60 sec an event is generated.
Distance
Set a distance interval, e.g. 100 m. Every 100 m sailed an event is
generated.
Line
Set a line distance interval, e.g.100 m. Every 100 m sailed along a
runline, a route or a wayline an event is generated.
9.2.2 Conditions
Click on to define the conditions for the eventing.
Figure 9-2 Conditions menu
An event can only be generated when this is according the selected

interval mode and when all the conditions set in the Conditions menu are
‘true’.
9.2.3 Push Button

In the Acquisition use F6 Next to the automatic eventing with the interval mode and the conditions a
for a manual event. state event can be generated. Check the option Generate manual event if
a state event is needed. Click on to select a push button device. This
device has to be selected in the Equipment page (see page 96).
This state event works independent from the automatic eventing. It only
looks at the information from the push button device to generate an event.
9.2.4 Event Definition

The way events are shown in the Messages – System Messages view
(see page 307) in the Acquisition is defined in the ‘Event Definition’.
156  Events PDS2000 - User Manual

Multiple definitions can be made and each definition has a name. The
event messages can be selected by that name in the Acquisition.
Select one of the event definitions and click on to open the Event
Definition editor. If no events are available, click on and a new
event definition can be created in the Event Definition editor. Another way
to open this editor is in the Explorer under the tab General. A new event
definition can be made only in the Projects Common tab of the Explorer
(see page 214).
Figure 9-3 Event Definition editor
The characteristics for an event are:

 An event can have multiple messages.
 Each message is divided into fields.
 The fields in one message have either field separators or fixed fields.
 Each field may contain text or a PDS2000 data item.
The way to build an new event definition is as follows:
 Create in the Explorer a new event. Enter a descriptive file name and
click on to open the Event Definition editor. Click on
in the editor to save the empty event.
 The event can be defined in the Acquisition (see page 254) or through
 the Event Definition editor in the Events page of the Configuration (see
page 68).
 In the Event Definition editor click at the bottom of the editor on
to add a new message. An event can contains several
messages. Select the type of message: Separator Delimited or Fixed
Field.
 Start creating a template. The template can contain text and/or data
items. The text can be typed directly in the template. For the data
items reserve space or place separators depending on the type of
message.
 Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
 If all the data items are selected the event string can be checked by
clicking on .

9.2.4.1 Separator Delimited
An example of a separate delimited event looks like:
>>>EVENT,[data item: event nr.],TIME,[data item: time of event],<<<
1. Select in the ‘Field separator’ the field separator needed for the event
message; in this case a comma ‘,’.
2. Type the following text in the template box: >>>EVENT,,TIME,,<<<
Where:
Field 1 is ‘>>>EVENT’
Field 2 is still empty
Field 3 is ‘TIME’
Field 4 is still empty
Field 5 is ‘<<<’
3. Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
Figure 9-4 Field definition for a separator delimited message
In this example select for ‘Field number’ number 2 or 4 to add one of

the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the field selection see the
‘Field Selection’ on page 159.
9.2.4.2 Fixed Field

An example of a fixed field event looks like:
Reference position X = xxxxxxxxx.xx Y = yyyyyyyyy.yy
1. Type the following text in the template box:
Reference position X = xxxxxxxxx.xx Y = yyyyyyyyy.yy
Where the x’s and y’s are the placeholders for the data items.

2. Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
Figure 9-5 Field definition for a fixed field message
In this example select for ‘Start character’ 23 for the X or 40 for the Y
and for ‘Field length’ in both cases 12 to add the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the fixed field see the ‘Field
Selection’ below.
9.2.4.3 Field Selection

The fields that are in both field definitions, separator delimited and fixed
fields, will be explained.
Label Mode
This describes the method how the data item is written in the event
string.
None. Only the value of the data item.
Data Description. The full data description plus the value of the data
item.
Data Mnemonic. A reduced data description (only its mnemonic) plus
the value of the data item.
User Label. The users can make their own label in the ‘User Label’
window.
User Label
The label in the event string created by the user. Only when for ‘Label
Mode’ the option User Label is selected.
Factor
A multiplication factor to multiply the value of the data item.
Offset
A constant that is added to the value of the data item.
Number of Decimals
The number of decimals for the value of the data item in the event
string.
Single Field
One data item can be selected for the location in the event string.
Double Field
Two data items can be selected for one location in the event string.
Between the data items a separator can be selected.

Select a data item for the event string.
If the Event Definition editor is started from the Explorer, the
 button is not available anymore.
If the Event Definition editor is started in the Configuration or in the
Acquisition, the standard PDS2000 equipment and computations tree
is shown.
Figure 9-6 Select Data in the event definition editor
9.3 Events Data Source

On this page the data sources can be selected for the events, e.g. in case
the distance interval is selected in the mode page, PDS2000 has to know
the data item for the distance measurement; a position source.
Figure 9-7 Data Source page of the events
Click on to select from the Select Data dialog the data item for the
relevant data source.

Figure 9-8 Select Data item for the position source
9.4 Events Numbering

On the numbering page the event number sequence can be set.
Figure 9-9 Numbering page of the events
Set a start number for the first event number and set the number
increment to the next event numbers. If the counting of the event numbers
is decreasing, check the Count down checkbox.

10 Control Center
10.1 Introduction
When PDS2000 is started always the Control Center will be opened.
From the Control Center all modules of the program can be started.
Before the Control Center of PDS2000 is started PDS2000 will do a check
 on the Operating System running on the computer. When the OS is

Windows XP SP2 or lower the Control Center will not be started. A
message will appear on the screen.
It is possible that after the Control Center is opened a popup is displayed
about the power management. See for more information about this
message and the checks the chapter ‘Power Management’ on page 204.
Most of the modules of PDS2000 can be started through the menu bar
and/or with a click on one of the buttons in the toolbar, a small part is only
accessible through the Explorer. See for more information the chapter
‘Explorer’ on page 209.
In this chapter the items that are not discussed in other chapters of the
manual will be discussed:
 Support issues in Help menu (see below)
 Display Mode (see page 165).
 Clock Synchronization (see page 165).
 Interfacing (see page 168).
 Import (see page 173).
 Batch Plot (see page 188)
 Quick Profile Plot (see page 190).
 Geo Calculator (see page 194).
 User Accounts (see page 200).
 Language (see page 203).
 Power Management (see page 204)
 General Settings (see page 206)
Some items will not be discussed in this manual; Lite View, Simulator and
SonarSwath.
The PDS2000 LiteView utility is a 3D viewer for multibeam data from
PDS2000 logdata files, for PDS2000 Grid Models and for 3D Design
Models. The Lite View can be opened from the menu bar with Tools > Lite
View.
See for a detailed explanation the manual PDS2000 LiteView (the file
PDS2000 LiteView.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
PDS2000 - User Manual Control Center  163

The Simulator utility is a stand-alone program that can simulate the most
common sensors. With this Simulator a setup in PDS2000 can be tested
before the actual sensors are connected. At the moment no manual is
available. The Simulator can be opened from the menu bar with Tools >
Simulator.
The SonarSwath utility is made to analyze processed bathymetry data
and generate a report of sonar performance as a function of the beam
launch angle or the beam distance from the center. The SonarSwath can
be opened from the menu bar with Tools > SonarSwath.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Sonar Swath (the file Sonar
Swath.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
10.2 Help Menu

In the menu item Help of the Control Center are several items available to
assist the user to update PDS2000 or contact RESON.
Figure 10-1 Help menu of the Control Center
Help Topics
It will open the Help file of PDS2000 which contains a copy of all the
PDS2000 manuals. The Help file can also be open with the F1-key.
Download PDS2000 Updates
The FTP site of PDS2000 will be opened to download the latest
version of PDS2000.
PDS2000 On The Web
The PDS2000 site on the RESON website will be opened.
PDS2000 On Twitter
The PDS2000 twitter site will be opened where the latest information
of PDS2000 is available.
View Release Notes
The release notes of PDS2000 will be opened in the default PDF
reader.
Send Feedback To RESON
Via email
The default email editor will be opened to send an email to the
helpdesk of PDS2000 (pds2000@reson.nl).
Via the web
The Support page on the RESON website will be opened.
Show Support Phone Numbers
The telephone numbers for the PDS2000 support in The Netherlands
and for the RESON support in Denmark and USA will be given.
164  Control Center PDS2000 - User Manual

Start RESON Remote Assistance
The RESON remote assistance will be started. In the start dialog the
ID of the user will be displayed. If the user tells his ID to the RESON
support, the RESON support can log in on the computer of the user to
see what the problem is.
Request Maintenance Contract (Update)
The default email editor will be opened to send an email to the
PDS2000 sales department (info@reson.nl). This contact can be used
to send an email when the dongle has to be updated or for questions
about the maintenance contract.
About Control Center
Information about the PDS2000 version, the dongle and the
maintenance contract will be displayed. See also the chapter ‘Update
of PDS2000 Dongle’ on page 20.
10.3 Display Mode

With the display mode the light conditions for the screen can be modified.
The display mode can be changed with View > Display Mode from the
menu bar or with from the toolbar.
The four different display modes are:
Normal ( )
The standard light conditions.
Night ( )
Less contrast and brightness, can be used during the night.
Twilight ( )
Less contrast, can be used when there is a twilight condition.
Bright ( )
Extra contrast and brightness, can be used when there is a sunshine
light condition.
The display modes are working fine for the Windows Themes
‘Windows Classic’ and ‘Windows 7 Basic’. For Night, Twilight and
 Bright in the Windows Theme ‘Windows 7’ (Aero Theme) not all the
items will be supported!
The display mode is also available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation windows with View > Display Mode from the menu bar.
10.4 Clock Synchronization

With this option in the Control Center an external clock can be selected to
synchronize PDS2000 with this clock. With the output option other
systems can be synchronized with PDS2000. After the selection of the
external clock, the clock synchronization can be switched on / off.
For a good synchronization between an external clock and PDS2000 a
clock with a 1PPS pulse is needed. It is also possible to use an external
clock without the 1PPS pulse, but this will not be that accurate as the
clock with the 1PPS pulse.
When no external clock and a time in message is used in PDS2000 in
 combination with a RESON SeaBat 7K sonar an alarm will be generated

to warn the user. PDS2000 needs an external clock before proper survey
can be done with a RESON SeaBat 7K sonar.

10.4.1 Clock Synchronization Settings
Select System > Clock Synchronization from the menu bar or click on
in the toolbar to open the Clock Synchronization window.
Figure 10-2 Clock Synchronization window with a selected clock device

External Clock Synchronization
Check this option to activate the clock synchronization.
This option may only be RESON 7k I/O module

used when the 7K I/O Select the option Use RESON 7k I/O module for clock synchronization
module runs on the same and the 7K I/O module will set the time of the PDS2000 computer. The
computer!!. 7K I/O module will also update the time on a regular bases.
PDS2000 ClockSync module
Select the option Use PDS2000 ClockSync module for clock
synchronization and the time of the PDS2000 computer will be synced
with the time from the selected clock device.
Clock device
The leap seconds can be
Select one of the clock devices and click on to display the
set in the GPS Time clock device as the ‘Selected clock device’.
Parameters of the Project For the clock devices with a GPS time automatically an extra item
Configuration (see page will be displayed in the window; the leap seconds. With these leap
63). seconds the GPS time will be corrected to UTC time.
Input
Click on the first select the right communication port with
the right settings (see page 168) for the time message of the
selected clock device.
When the pulse (PPS) is on the same port as the time message
then the pulse is automatically interfaced. If the pulse is on a
different port then click on the second to select the port for
the pulse.

If the clock device is connected to the system, click on to
check the communication port and the data received from the
selected clock device. The Clock Sync window is from the same
type as the Device Test window in the Equipment page (see page
96).
Output
Check the option Enable if a time output is wanted for another
system. Click on to select the clock output device and the
right communication port with the right settings for the output.
Click on to activate the clock synchronization.
If the clock synchronization is activated and the Clock Synchronization
window is opened, the clock synchronization will be inactivated. This is
done to run for instance the device test in the Clock Synchronization
window. Click on to activate the clock synchronization again.
10.4.2 Activate Clock Synchronization

PDS2000 will display on two locations if the clock synchronization is
activated, in the Connections window of the Control Center and with in
the taskbar on the bottom right hand side. These two locations will only
show that the clock synchronization is activated, not that it is working
properly.
 If the clock synchronization is activated but no data is received then it is

not possible to start the Acquisition in the Realtime mode!!!!
Figure 10-3 Clock synchronization is activated in the Connections window
With double click on in the taskbar the Clock Sync window will be
opened. This is the same window (Clock Sync – System messages) as
when on is clicked in the Clock Synchronization window (see
page 166). The only difference is that in the menu bar the option Edit is
added.
Click with the right button of the mouse on and a context menu is
opened with the options Show and Exit. With Show the same window as
with the double click on the icon is opened and with Exit will disappear
from the taskbar but the clock synchronization will not be inactivated.
Figure 10-4 Icon in the taskbar with its context menu
The only way to inactivate the clock synchronization is to uncheck the

 option External Clock Synchronization in the Clock Synchronization
window (see page 166).
10.4.3 PDS2000 SetTime Service

During the installation of PDS2000 the PDS2000SettimeService will be
installed. This service can modify the computer clock when the clock

synchronization is running and the computer clock has to be synced with
the time from the clock device.
When a new PDS2000 version is installed while another version is
already installed then the PDS2000SettimeService will be uninstalled and
installed again for the new version. This is done to be sure that the latest
version of the PDS2000SettimeService is running. It will still work for the
older versions.
When the user decide to remove an older version of PDS2000 then also
the PDS2000SettimeService will be uninstalled. It is possible that the
service is still available because Windows sometime does not allow to
uninstall the service. But in most cases the service is uninstalled thus not
available anymore for the other already installed versions of PDS2000.
The Clocksync will give a warning when the PDS2000SettimeService is
not available anymore. To make the service active again the user has to
 re-install the PDS2000 version that is already installed on the PC. Use
during the re-installation the option ‘Repair’ to get the service running
again (see page 15).
10.5 Interfacing
On the Equipment page an IO port has to be set when a sensor is added
to the device list (see page 96). When in the Equipment page on
is clicked only the communication ports for that specific
device driver are available and not all possible interfaces can be selected.
In the Interfacing window which can be opened in the Control Center all
the different communication ports are available.
10.5.1 Interfacing Page
Figure 10-5 Interfacing window
Select from the menu bar the option System > Interfacing or click on in
the toolbar to open the Interfacing window.
By default only the serial communication ports COM1 – 16 are displayed
in this window. If in the Equipment page for a specific device driver
another communication port is added then this new communication port
will be visible in the Interfacing window.

The visible ports can be selected and on the right side in the window the
settings will be displayed and can be modified if necessary. If a
 communication port is modified in the Interfacing window then the settings
of this port, if it is used in the Equipment page, will also be changed.
Click on to add a new port or a new type of port to the list. In the
Select Interface dialog one of the available types for the selected device
can be selected. Select one of the available interface types and a new
network port name, a new com port name or a new OPC port name has
to be entered.
The different interfaces that are available are:
 XSE (see below)
 Socket (see page 169)
 Serial (see page 170)
 RTA (see page 171)
 RGL (see page 171)
 R7KI (see page 171)
 R7K (see page 172)
 OPC (see page 172)
 NCC (see page 173)
 EDGETECH (see page 173)
It will depend on the device driver which interfaces will be available.
10.5.1.1 XSE
This type of communication port is only used for an Elac system. A
network port has to be entered and on the right side in the Interfacing
page an IP-address has to be entered for the XSE server.
Figure 10-6 Example of an IP-address for a XSE server
10.5.1.2 Socket
This type of communication port is a network connection and can be used
for receiving and/or sending data through a network connection.
Figure 10-7 Example of a network settings for a socket communication port

Local Port
The network port on the PDS2000 computer.
Host Address
The IP-address of the remote system. This is the system that sends
the data.
If the remote system is on the same computer as where PDS2000 is
running, the host address is 127.0.0.1.
Host Port
The network port on the remote system.
Check host address
This option is only relevant if the protocol is UDP/IP.
If the option is checked, only the data from the host address will be
accepted.
Protocol
There are two network protocols available:
UDP/IP. This protocol will be used for the communication with the
RESON multibeam systems.
TCP/IP. If this protocol is used an IP-address has to be entered as
host address. This protocol checks the communication between the
two ports before it send or received data.
IP Multicast
This is broadcasting from/to a select group of recipients. Check the
option Join multicast to receive or send data in the group. The group
name has to be entered. Normally this name is created by the sender
of the data. The protocol for IP multicast is always UDP/IP.
The table below gives the setting for receiving and sending data:
Receiving Sending Receiving & Sending
Local Port local port number 0 local port number
Host Address empty host IP address host IP address
Host Port 0 host port number host port number
 The ‘empty’ mentioned above in the table can also be replaced by ‘host IP
address’ when only the data from the host address has to be accepted.
10.5.1.3 Serial
This type of communication port is a serial connection, called COM port,
and can be used for all the sensors with a serial connection.
If more than one COM port has to be used, serial extender cards have to
be installed. See in the chapter ‘Installation’ on page 17 for more
information.
Figure 10-8 Example of the settings for a serial port

10.5.1.4 RTA
The RTA communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the devices which are received from the RTA (Real Time Appliance) box
used for the Odom ES3.
Figure 10-9 Example of the settings for a R7K communication
The Base Port Number is by default set on the right number (2020), do
not change this!!
Select the sensor type that matches with the selected device.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Interface Setup chapter Odom
ES3 (the file Interface Setup.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
10.5.1.5 RGL
The RGL communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the laser scan devices Riegl and Riegl Vline. The port cannot be selected
it will automatically selected when one of these laser scan types is
selected as device.
Figure 10-10 Example of the settings for a RGL communication
Host Address
The IP address is always from the Riegl laser scan.
10.5.1.6 R7KI
The R7KI communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. This communication port is identical with
the Socket port as described above.
Figure 10-11 Example of the settings for a R7KI communication
See ‘Socket’ on page 169 for an explanation of the view.

10.5.1.7 R7K
The R7K communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. The port cannot be selected it will
automatically selected when a RESON SeaBat 7K system is selected as
device.
Figure 10-12 Example of the settings for a R7K communication
Host Address
The host is always the 7K data server and, when it is running on the
same computer as PDS2000, the address is 127.0.0.1. If the 7K data
server is running on another computer then the address is the IP
address of the other computer.
Protocol
The protocol has to be UDP/IP.
This port can be used for all 7K drivers that need information from the 7K
data server, like the multibeam, the side scan sonar and the snippets, or
send information to the 7K data server, like the output to 7K.
10.5.1.8 OPC
The OPC communication port is a kind of network connection. The port
cannot be selected it will automatically selected when an OPC device is
selected.
Figure 10-13 OPC server has to be selected for the OPC communication
Before OPC (OPen Connectivity) can be used special software has to be

installed on the PDS2000 or external computer.
Force OPC 1.0a connection
Check this option when an old 1.0a connection is used.
Server on local computer
Check this option when the OPC server is running on the PDS2000
computer.
Address
This will automatically be filled with ‘localhost’ when the option
Server on local computer is checked.
When the OPC server is running on an external; computer add
here the IP address of the external computer.
Server name
Select the server name as use on the PDS2000 or external
computer.

OPC Server brand: ArchestrA FSGateway
Check this option when as OPC server brand the ArchestrA
FSGateway is used.
10.5.1.9 NCC
This type of communication port is needed for the Navisound echo
sounders. The port is a dummy port which is used in PDS2000 to
communicate with the Navisound. The actual port and settings are
defined in the Navisound Control Center (see page 99).
The NCC port is automatically created when a Navisound echo sounder is
selected in the Equipment. So it is not necessary to add a NCC port, but
when by accident the port is deleted while the Navisound is already
selected then the port can be added. It is not needed to define the baud
rate, etc. because this will be done in the Navisound Control Center.
There can be only one NCC port in the Interfacing available.
10.5.1.10 Edgetech
The Edgetech communication port is a network connection and is specific
for the Edgetech side scan sonar system. This communication port is
identical with the Socket port as described above, only the Local port and
the multicast are disabled.
Figure 10-14 Example of the settings for an Edgetech communication
10.6 Import
On several places in PDS2000 data files can be imported and converted
to information that can be used in PDS2000. The different import
possibilities will be discussed in the different modules of PDS2000.
The import in the Control Center is made to convert data files to PDS2000
log data files.
If the Select Tool dialog is
not visible, select File > Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Import or click on in the
New from the menu bar or toolbar to open the PDS2000 Import Utility. When the PDS2000 Import
click on in the toolbar Utility window is opened it will be an empty window with the Select Tool
to open the dialog. dialog on top of it.

Figure 10-15 PDS2000 Import Utility
Select in the Select Tool dialog the type of import for which a new import
configuration has to be created or select an existing import configuration.
An existing import configuration can also be opened with File > Open from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar.
If a new import configuration has to be created it is also possible to use
an existing import configuration file as a base. Check the option Copy
from existing config file and select the file that has to be used as a start.
At the end of the configuration the new import configuration can be saved
by clicking on in the toolbar or select File > Save As… from the menu
bar.
If there is already an import configuration that can be used with the import
files check the option Open existing and select the right import
configuration.
At the moment the PDS2000 Import Utility can import the following data:
 Single Beam XYZ (see below)
 XTF (see page 183)
 S7K (see page 184)
 SZ (see page 186)
 Simrad EM3000 (see page 187)

10.6.1 Single Beam XYZ Import
Figure 10-16 First page of the Single Beam XYZ Import
The three different XYZ options are:

ASCII (X,Y,Z)
Contains X, Y, Z data with or without an ID to identify the line.
ASCII Customised
Contains X, Y, Z data. It is also possible to have in each line a date, a
time and an ID.
Navisoft PRD
This is the ASCII output file from Navisoft.
Select one of the three formats, select the number of channels in the data
file(s) and the sign convention for the Z-value. Click on to start
the setup of the import configuration or to check the import configuration if
an existing configuration. If an existing import configuration is selected or
the import wizard is finished, click on to start the import of the
data.
For the Navisoft PRD files it is not necessary to open the import
configuration file. The user can click on and select the PRD files
for the import.
With the import configuration will be opened. It will depend on the
selection of the XYZ format and the number of channels which pages will
appear before the actual import can be started.

10.6.1.1 ASCII File Options
Figure 10-17 ASCII File Options page in the import configuration
This page will only appear when ASCII Customised is selected.

The options are:
Parsing with filter ID’s
Check this option when ID’s are present in the data file(s) and the ID’s
will be used to specify the data lines.
Timetag parsing
Date and time are available in the data file(s).
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate
No date or time is available in the data file(s). With this option a date
and a time will be generated from the manual information which can be
set in one of the other pages in the import utility (see page 177).
10.6.1.2 Runline Options
Figure 10-18 Runline Options page in the import configuration

This page will appear when ASCII (X,Y,Z) or ASCII Customised is
selected.
The options are:
Pick runline from project
An existing runline from the project have to be selected in the next
page.
Parse X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 to generate runline
Extract from the data file(s) with the use of an ID the start and end
coordinates of the runline (s).
Create runline from rough estimate of XYZ data
Calculate the start and end coordinates of the runline from the first and
last X and Y in the data file.
There is a restriction in the order of information in the data file(s) when the
runline information is extracted from the data file(s) with option Parse X1,
Y1, X2 and Y2 … The data file(s) can contain more sets of XYZ data,
where the first line in the data set starts with the ID of the runline and the
X1, Y1, X2 and Y2. The following lines should contain the ID for the XYZ
data and the XYZ data. If after the XYZ data a line contains the ID for the
runline again then a new file with a new runline and XYZ data will be
created.
10.6.1.3 File Selection
Figure 10-19 File Selection page in the import configuration
This page will appear for all three formats. The number of columns on this
page depends on the selections in the pages before.
Click on to add a data file to the file selection. If in the runline
options page (see page 176) the option Pick runline from project is
checked and/or in the ASCII file options page (see page 176) the option
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate is checked, an Edit
Import File Settings window will be opened after the selection of the
file(s).

Figure 10-20 Import file settings for the import data file
Import file
The added data file from the File Selection page.
Runline File
Select with an existing runline from the project.
This option will be shown if the option Pick runline from project in the
run line options page is checked (see page 176).
The next three fields will be shown if the options Timetag generation from
start time and ping rate in the ASCII file options page (see page 176) is
checked or the ASCII (X,Y,Z) data file with or without an ID is selected.
Start date
Click on next to the date and select in the calendar the right start
date.
Figure 10-21 Calendar
Start time
Set the right start time of the first XYZ in the data file. Select the hours,
minutes or seconds with the mouse, type in the right value or use the
up and down arrows to change the numbers.
Ping rate (Hz)
Set the frequency for the XYZ data; how many times per second is the
XYZ data presented in the data file.
Click on in the Edit Import File Settings window to go back to the
file selection page. With in the file selection page, the Edit Import
File Settings window can be opened to check or modify the import file
settings. will only be active if a runline, date or time can be set.
If all the data files are added and the runline, date and time are set, click
on .

10.6.1.4 ASCII Parsing Wizards
Figure 10-22 ASCII parsing in the import configuration
To click on behind one of the options will start the wizard for the right
settings of the selected option. It depends on the selection of the ASCII
data file and on the selections made in the pages before which parsing
options will be available on this page.
The different parsing options can be:
1. Parsing Of Date, Time, X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
2. Parsing Of X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
3. Parsing Of X1, Y1, X2, Y2 For Runline
Option 1 and 2 starts with the parsing of the XYZ data (see below). After
that option 1 will continue with the parsing of the date and time (see page
182) and option 2 will be finished. Option 3 is a separate parsing option
(see page 183).
If the parsing of one of the options is finish a checkmark ( ) will be
placed before the option. If all the parsing is done will become
active. Click on and the first page of the import utility will be
opened again.

10.6.1.5 Parsing XYZ Data
Figure 10-23 Settings for parsing the XYZ data
On this page the settings for the XYZ data are set, so that on the next
page the right columns with XYZ data can be selected.
File
The filename displayed in the file box is the first file from the file
selection page. At the bottom, in ‘Preview Data’, the data of that file is
shown.
Original data type
Delimited. Check this option if the data is separated with a delimiter,
such as a comma, a tab or a space.
Fixed Width. Check this options if the data is aligned in columns with
spaces in between.
Skip lines
Check this option if the first line(s) of the data file(s) contains
information that is not runline data or XYZ data.
Give a number for the number of lines that have to be skipped.
Line ID
Give an ID for the lines that have to be extracted from the data file. If
an ID is given, the preview data will change and will only show the
lines in the data file with the given ID. In the example shown above,
the ID for the XYZ data is ‘EC’ and for the runline ‘RT’.
If all the settings are set, click on to go to the second page for
parsing XYZ data.

Figure 10-24 Select the delimited columns in the data file
This page will appear when Delimited is checked on the first page of
parsing XYZ data. If Fixed Width is checked the page will be similar as
the page for parsing the date and time, only the sub items will be X, Y, Z
and optional date and time (see page 182).
On this page the delimiter and the columns have to be defined.
Delimiter
Select a character as delimiter between the data fields. The options
are comma, tab, space or custom. With custom a user defined
character can be added.
If in the ASCII file options Fields
page (see page 176) the If a column is selected in ‘Select Column Names’, a column number
option Timetag parsing is will be added to the selected field name.
checked, also the date and
the time column have to be Select column names
selected. Click with the right mouse button on a column and select one of the
available field names for the selected column.
If all the columns which are necessary for the import are selected, the
button will become active (only for parsing XYZ data). Click on
and go back to the first page of the import utility.
If the parsing contains a date and time, the ASCII Parsing Wizard will
continue with parsing date and time (see below).

10.6.1.6 Parsing Date And Time
The next type of page will appear when a date and a time column is
selected in parsing XYZ data on page 181 or when Fixed Width is
selected as delimiter in the first page of parsing XYZ data on page 180.
Figure 10-25 Select the month in the date column
The locations of the year, month and day in the date column are defined
with a start and end position in the column.
Double click in ‘Column For Field Name:’ on year, month or day and an
edit window will be opened.
Start Position
Set the start position of the item; in the example above the month
(here 02) starts at position 5.
Stop Position
Set the stop (end) position of the item; in the example above the
month (here 02) stops at position 6.
Factor
The multiplication factor should be 1.
Offset
An offset can be added to the selected item value to get the right
value. If for instance the year is presented in the data file as 05, then
with an offset of 2000 the year becomes 2005.
If the year, month and day are set, click on to go to the page for
parsing the time. This page works similar as the page for parsing the
date, only here are the items hour, minute, second and millisecond. If the
hour, minute and second is set (millisecond is optional) becomes
active.

10.6.1.7 Parsing Runline Data
If in the runline options page (see page 176) the option Parse X1, Y1, X2
and Y2 to generate runline is checked, a page will be opened to set the
settings for the runline data in the data file.
This page will be similar to the first page of the parsing XYZ data on page
180. Give on this page an ID for the line where the X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 are
defined.
If all the settings are set, click on to go to the second page for
parsing runline data.
This second page will similar to the second page of parsing XYZ data
(see page 180). On this page four columns have to be selected before
will become active.
10.6.2 XTF Import
Figure 10-26 XTF Import page
Click on to select the XTF file for the import. It is possible to add
more XTF files before the import is started.
Check one of the options Import sidescan data, Import snippet data or
Import tide data if side scan data, snippets or tide data is available in the
XTF file(s) and have to be imported.
Click on to start the import of the XTF file(s).

10.6.3 S7K Import
Figure 10-27 S7K Import page
Click on to select the S7K file for the import. It is possible to add
more S7K files before the import is started.
For bathymetry data at least the following records should be logged in the
 S7K file:
 For Position :1003; or 1015
  For Heading and Attitude: 1004; or 1011 and 1012; or 1016

 For Bathymetry: 7000, 7004 and 7006; or 7000, 7004 and 7027
Check one of the options Import sidescan data or Import snippet data if
side scan data or snippets data is available in the S7K file(s) and have to
be imported.
When the data is logged with a survey vessel check the option Surface
Vessel and when the data is logged with an underwater vehicle, like a
ROV or AUV, check the option Subsea Vessel.
Click on to start the import of the S7K file(s).
10.6.3.1 Offsets
When in the S7K file(s) the record 7030 is missing, automatically an
offsets dialog will be opened. The offsets for the Position, Attitude,
Multibeam and Sealevel can be added manually or loaded from a file.
In the file all the items in the dialog should be mentioned with the terms as
displayed below in the text file.

Figure 10-28 Text file with the offsets values for the offsets dialog
Figure 10-29 Offsets dialog in the Import
Check the option Apply to all files when for all the S7K files in the import
the same offsets have to be applied.

10.6.4 SZ Import
Figure 10-30 SZ Import page
Click on to add SZ files to the list. If the SZ data contains records

with survey data (record 2122), the ‘Grid model settings’ becomes
relevant. The survey data will be placed in a grid model. The default
setting for the ‘Interpolation’ is No interpolation. If the user wants to fill the
grid model, select the option Interpolate circular and the empty cells
between the runlines will be interpolated. This circular interpolation will
take a long time. The cell size of the grid model can be set, with the
smaller the cell size the more detailed the grid model is and the longer it
takes to fill the grid model.
Click on to start the import of the added SZ files. It will depend on
the information in the SZ file, what will be generated in the import. For SZ
files with design information the following files will be generated.
 3D Model file with the design profiles.
 3D Model file with the GLW values (levels).
 Track Guidance Route file with the route of the axis of the river.
 Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river.
 Runline file with the reference lines for the left and right side of the
sailing channel, for the left and right side of the river and for the axis of
the river.
For SZ files with survey data the following files will be generated.
 Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river. If also design
information is available in the SZ file, this file is identical with the
runline file mentioned above.
 Grid Model file with the survey data and with the interpolated data if
applicable.
 PDS2000 log data files for each cross line.

 Log data file set with all the PDS2000 log data files mentioned above.
10.6.5 Simrad EM3000 Import
Figure 10-31 Simrad EM3000 Import page
Click on to select the ALL files for the import. It is possible to add
more ALL files before the import is started.
Check the option Apply imported sound velocity profile to PDS2000 file
when the imported sound velocity profile data from the ALL file has to be
 applied to the created PDS2000 logdata file. When more ALL files have
the same sound velocity profile only one sound velocity profile file is
created in PDS2000.
Click on to start the import of the Simrad EM3000 file(s).
10.6.6 Save Import Configuration

When the import was successful the import configuration can be saved
with File > Save or File > Save As...from the menu bar or with from
the toolbar.
If the PDS2000 Import Utility is closed without saving the import
configuration, the program will ask to save the import configuration.
The next time the same type of data files have to be imported the import
configuration can be selected.
For a single beam XYZ import click on and the file selection page
(see page 177) will be opened. After the to be imported files are selected,
click on and the import will start.
For a XTF, a S7K, a SZ and a Simrad EM3000 import add the files and
click on to start the import.

10.6.7 PDS2000 Log Data File
The created PDS2000 log data files are automatically placed in a File Set
which can be used in the Editing (see pagexxx).
The format of the created log data files is similar to the standard
PDS2000 log data files. The log data file created through the import will
look like:
Import name[Application type]_Runline name-date-time.pds
where:
Import name
ImportSingle Beam - 01; the import name is contains the file name of
the data file; here ‘Single Beam - 01.asc’.
Application type
The application type will be the application type of the active project.
Runline name
In the single beam XYZ import a runline name can be selected. This
runline name will be written in the log data file name.
If the runline is made with the start and end X and Y or the X1,Y1,X2
and Y2 from the XYZ data file, then the runline name will always be
‘Runline.0’. This runline will not be created in the project, but is only
available with the data of the log data file.
In the S7K import the runline name is always ‘Runline.0’, which is
generated from the start and end coordinates in the file.
In the SZ import the runline name is always the runline as used in the
SZ file. That means that for each runline in the SZ file a separate log
data file will be generated.
In the XTF import and in the Simrad EM3000 import the runline name
is always ‘NO_LINE’, which means no runline is defined.
date-time
The date and time of the import.
10.7 Batch Plot

The Batch Plot is a tool to generate a plot with grid model data based on
a plot template. The Batch Plot uses a plot template in combination with
user specified XYZ data.
Before the Batch Plot can be started a plot project with a plot template
has to be created in the Plot (see pagexxx). The plot template should be a
plot with a grid model in the plan.
The Batch Plot can be started with Tools > Batch Plot from the menu bar.
10.7.1 Batch Plot Dialog

The Batch Plot will open without any data or information selected. When a
setup is saved it is possible to open a setup so all the data and
information is loaded.

Figure 10-32 Batch Plot
Survey data
A XYZ file have to be selected with . From this XYZ data file a grid
model will be generated and that grid model will replace the grid model
in the plot template.
The Name Prefix is automatically generated when the XYZ data file is
selected. The user can modified the prefix if he wants. The prefix
name will be used in the plot file and in the DXF file.
Check the option XYZ file contains Depths when the Z values in the
XYZ data file are depths. This is necessary because the depths in the
 grid model are negative heights. So the Z values from the XYZ file get
a minus sign when the option is checked.
DTM
The generated grid model will Set the cell size for the grid model that have to be generated from the
be store with the name of the XYZ data file. The cell size doesn’t have to be the same as in the XYZ
XYZ file in the project. data file.

If there are gaps in the data or the grid model cell size is smaller than
the size in the XYZ data file then the data in the grid model can be
interpolated. As interpolation methods are available Circular and
Triangular. For more information about the interpolation see page 535
and pagexxx.
In the grid model the Hit Count is always present. The user can select
which data types should be in the grid model, he can choose between
Z Average, Z Minimum (Deepest) and Z Maximum (Highest). The data
type that is used in the plot template should always be selected
otherwise no data will be plotted. The other two data types are extra.
 When there is an interpolation and all three data types are selected
then for all three an interpolation will be done.
Plot selection
Select a plot project with . In this plot project the plot template
should be available.
Add one or more plot templates from the selected plot project for which
the generated grid model is valid.
Text labels
The text labels as defined in the plot template can be modified in the
column ‘User Text’. This modified text will be used in the plot which will
be generated.
A Batch Plot setup file (BPP file) can be opened. This file contains all
the information to set all the items in the Batch Plot dialog.
Saves a modified setup to the related BPP file.
Saves the setup and specify the name for the BPP file.
Opens the Print Setup dialog to setup the printer.
Prints the generated plot to the printer that is selected in the Print
Setup dialog.
Creates a plot file with the prefix name, date and time in the selected
plot project.
Creates a DXF file with the prefix name, date and time in the project
folder.
Closes the Batch Plot dialog without saving the setup in a BPP file.
10.8 Quick Profile Plot

The Quick Profile Plot is a tool to generate quickly profile plots based on a
plot template. The Quick Profile Plot uses the plot template in combination
with user specified data, like runlines and grid models.
Before the Quick Profile Plot can be started a plot project with a plot
template has to be created in the Plot (see page 547). The plot template
should be a profile plot based on runlines. Next to the runlines, file sets,
grid models, design models and text can be used to setup the plot
template. For each runline as selected in the runlines files a different
profile plot will be generated.

The Quick Profile Plot can be started with Tools > Quick Profile Plot from
the menu bar.
10.8.1 Quick Profile Plot Setup

The Quick Profile Plot will be opened with no plot project and plot
template specified. Specify the plot project and from the plot project the
plot template that has to be used in the Quick Profile Plot. Automatically
all the runlines files used in the project that is related to the plot project
will be displayed.
Figure 10-33 Quick Profile Plot with a plot project and a plot template selected
In the tabs Filesets, DTM, Design and Text the right files for the profiles
plots can be selected and also the right text can be specified.
Under Select Runlines the runlines files or a set of runlines can be
selected which will be used to generate the profile plots.
10.8.1.1 Filesets
Figure 10-34 Tab Filesets in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template log data is specified as a layer
then with this tab the file set for the profile plots can be specified. Click on
to select an existing log data file set in the project for the
selected layer.

10.8.1.2 DTM
Figure 10-35 Tab DTM in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a grid model is specified as a

layer then with this tab the grid model for the profile plots can be
specified. Click on to select an existing grid model in the
project for the selected layer.
10.8.1.3 Design
Figure 10-36 Tab Design in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a design model is specified as a

layer then with this tab the design model for the profile plots can be
specified. Click on the arrow in , select the model that will be
used (a profile design model, a grid model or a 3D design model) and
select then an existing model in the project for the selected layer.

10.8.1.4 Text
Figure 10-37 Tab Text in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a text block is specified as a

layer then with this tab the text for the profile plots can be specified. Click
on to set the text for the selected text block.
10.8.2 Quick Profile Plot Options

In the Quick Profile Plot the setup can be saved and opened again, the
profile plots can printed, plot files and DXF files can be generated.
 If the setup with the file selections is saved, the saved setup can be
opened again. Before
selected.
is used the plot project has to be
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with the name of the plot template.
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with a name specified by the user.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a preview
of the plot will be displayed. Click on in the preview file plot to
close the preview and continue with the preview of the next selected
runline. The preview can be stopped by closing the file plot preview
with .
For the selected runline in the General tab a preview of the plot will be
displayed. Click on or to close the preview.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab
pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file with the name of the plot template and a sequence number.
After the plot files are generated they will be printed.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab

pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file.
A dialog will be opened to define the plot file name. The name can be
the plot template name, the name of the runline or a name specified by
the user. The plot files will be generated with the defined name and a
sequence number. The plot files with the runline name do not have a
sequence number.
Before the DXF file can be created the plot files has to be generated
as discussed above in the option .
After the plot files are generated for each plot file a DXF file will be
created and will be placed in the plot project directory.
If a lot of DXF files has to be created, it can take a long time before the
 creation of all the DXF files is finished. Move the cursor over the plot
icon ( ) in the taskbar and a display will tell the user how many tasks
(DXF files) still have to be processed. In the example below still 176
DXF files has to be created.
Figure 10-38 Still 176 DXF files has to be created
The Quick Profile Plot will be closed and the setup will not be saved.
10.9 Geo Calculator

The Geo Calculator is a tool for coordinate conversions. At the moment
two different manual coordinate conversions with a reporting capability
are available.
The first conversion is a conversion where only the project configuration
and the project coordinate system can be used. The second conversion is
a conversion between two selectable coordinate systems.
It is also possible to compute a 3 parameters shift from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid and to convert a file with coordinates using
the project coordinate system.
The values for the latitude and longitude in the different pages does not
 have to be in the format as displayed, it can be entered in several
formats. For example: 56°30’07.2” N, 56 30 7.2 N or 56.502 N.
The Geo Calculator can be started with Tools > Geo Calculator from the
menu bar.
10.9.1 Manual Coordinate Conversion

The manual coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator can
convert satellite ellipsoid coordinates (like WGS’84 or ETRS89) with the
use of a datum transformation to local ellipsoid coordinates and projection
coordinates or vice versa.
When a route is selected the KP and offtrack will be calculated for the
coordinate that is used in the conversion. When a KP and offtrack is
entered the satellite ellipsoid coordinates, the local ellipsoid coordinates
and the projection coordinates will be calculated.
The coordinate system in this conversion is always the project coordinate
system. A report can be generated with the calculated conversion.

When the manual coordinate conversion is selected, the project
configuration with the project coordinate system will be displayed.
Figure 10-39 Manual Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Satellite ellipsoid coordinate

The latitude, the longitude and the altitude for the satellite ellipsoid, for
instance WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates.
With the display Local ellipsoid coordinate
format for the coordinates The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
can be changed. will be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates can be
added manually and all other coordinates will then be calculated
automatically.
Grid coordinate
The Easting, the Northing and the height in projection coordinates will
be calculated automatically. When a geoid model is present in the
coordinate system the height becomes the geoidal height. If necessary
the coordinates and height can be added manually and all other
coordinates will then be calculated automatically. The convergence
(see below) and point scale factor (see page 196) are always
calculated.
Route Coordinate
Select a route and the KP and offtrack will be calculated. If necessary
the KP and/or offtrack can be added manually and all other
coordinates will then be calculated automatically.
Generate a report that is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select the

menu option File > Save as… in the reporter to save the report as PDF
file.

10.9.1.1 Convergence
The grid convergence is the angle between grid north and true north, so
in fact the angle between the grid lines and the projection of the
meridians. When using a gyro compass, and its input is read by
PDS2000, the heading value cannot directly be used in the computations.
The value has to be corrected for the grid convergence to obtain a grid
heading which can be used for the computations.
The complete computation for the grid heading is:
Grid Heading = True Heading + Convergence + Heading Correction
For some projection there is a grid skew. This skew will be added to the
convergence.
The heading correction is the correction derived from a gyro compass
calibration.
Below an example for a Transverse Mercator (TM) grid convergence.
Figure 10-40 TM grid convergence
10.9.1.2 Point Scale Factor

For the projections a scale factor on the central meridian is defined. This
is done to minimize the distortion in the conversion from the latitude and
longitude on the local ellipsoid to the grid easting and northing.

For an UTM the scale factor is 0.9996 on the central meridian. When we
move to the east or west the scale factor will become bigger.
10.9.2 Advance Manual Conversion

The advance manual conversion page of the Geo Calculator can convert
from one local ellipsoid with its own projection to another local ellipsoid
with its own projection. The conversion from one ellipsoid to the other will
go via WGS’84 or ETRS89. All the coordinate systems in database can
be selected, that means that both coordinate system should have the
same satellite ellipsoid. A report can be generated with the calculated
conversion. Use to change the coordinate system.
Figure 10-41 Advance Manual Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Local ellipsoid coordinate

With the display The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
format for the coordinates will be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates can be
can be changed. added manually and all other coordinates will then be calculated
automatically.
Grid coordinate
be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates and height
can be added manually and all other coordinates will then be
calculated automatically. The convergence (see page 196) and point
scale factor (see above) are always calculated.
Generate a report that is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select the

menu option File > Save as… in the reporter to save the report as PDF
file.

10.9.3 Compute 3 Shift Parameters
On this page of the Geo Calculator a 3 parameters shift can be computed
for the transformation from the satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid. This
 3 shift parameters will be calculated for the satellite ellipsoid and local
ellipsoid as specified in the project coordinate system.
Figure 10-42 Compute 3 Shift Parameters page in the Geo Calculator
Satellite ellipsoid coordinate

The latitude, the longitude and the altitude for the satellite ellipsoid, for
instance WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates.
With the display Local ellipsoid coordinate
format for the coordinates The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
can be changed. will not be calculated automatically when the satellite ellipsoid is
entered. If the coordinates are entered the grid coordinates will be
Grid coordinate
be calculated automatically when the local ellipsoid is entered. If the
coordinates are entered the local ellipsoid coordinates will be
3 Shift Parameters
The 3 shift parameters for the transformation from the satellite ellipsoid
to the local ellipsoid.

10.9.4 File Coordinate Conversion
In the file coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator a file with
 coordinates can be converted to a file with converted coordinates using
the two selectable coordinate systems.
Figure 10-43 File Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Source Coordinate System

Click on to select the coordinate system that is used in
the ASCII file. Select then the coordinate type that is used in the file.
The four different coordinate types are:
Satellite Ellipsoid
The coordinates should be WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates. The
The coordinates can be
latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude
specified in different
formats: 56°30’07.2” N, 56 is available the conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
30 7.2 N or 56.502 N. If no Local Ellipsoid
N,S, E or W is added The coordinates should be in the local ellipsoid system that is
PDS2000 assumes that it
specified in the project coordinate system. The latitude, longitude
is N or E.
and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude is available the
conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
Grid
The coordinates should be in the projection that is specified in the
coordinate system. The Easting, Northing and height are required.
If no height is available the conversion assumes that the height is
0.
Route
The coordinates should be in KP, Offtrack and height. The KP and
Offtrack should be related to the route that selected. If no height is
available the conversion assumes that the height is 0.

Destination Coordinate System
Click on to select the coordinate system that has to be
used in the output file. Select then the coordinate type that has to be
used in the output file. The four different coordinate types are:
Satellite Ellipsoid
The latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are in WGS’84 or
ETRS89, depends on what is defined in the destination coordinate
system.
Local Ellipsoid
The latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are in the local
coordinate system as is defined in the destination coordinate
system.
Grid
The Easting, Northing and height are in the projection as defined in
the destination coordinate system.
Route
The KP, Offtrack and height are related to the route that is
specified.
File Conversion
In the file conversion 4 At the moment only one output format is available, Comma Separated
extra fields can be Volume (the output file is a CSV file).
converted from the source Click on to start the file conversion. The ASCII Import
file to the destination file. Wizard will be open to select the right columns in the ASCII file. See
for more information about the ASCII Import Wizard on page 136.
10.10 User Accounts

For the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation it is possible
to create user accounts. By default two accounts are already present,
Administrator and Basic Operator. The Administrator level has access to
all options in PDS2000 while the Basic Operator has very limited access.
The administrator is set as the default user account.
To add and/or modified the user accounts select in the Control Center the
menu option Tools > User Accounts… and the User Accounts window will
be opened.
Figure 10-44 User Accounts window
The two default user accounts, Administrator and Basic Operator, do not
have a password yet. If the user wants a password to protect these two
accounts, select a user account and click on to open the User
dialog to add a password.

Figure 10-45 User dialog
Enter the password in the field Password and repeat this in Retype
password. With the option Show password the actual text of the password
is displayed, if this option is unchecked only dots will be displayed (see
above).
At the moment are two access level present. With a new
access level can be added or an existing user level can be modified (see
below).
10.10.1 Manage User Levels
Figure 10-46 Manage user level access window with the two default access
levels, Administrator and Basic Operator.
In this window the menu options from the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation that can be switched on/off are displayed. The menu
options that are accessible in all different access levels are not displayed.

The access levels are only valid for one application type. Each application
 type has its own access levels, this is due to that menu options per
application type can differ.
The two default access levels, as displayed above, cannot be deleted or
modified. If the user wants for some menu options a different access as
defined with the two defaults then a new access level has to be created.
Click on and the Add user access level dialog will be opened.
Figure 10-47 Add user access level dialog
Check the option Make copy of access level if an existing access level
has to be used as base for the new one. If the option is unchecked all the
menu options in the new access level will be switched off (set on No).
Figure 10-48 Manage user level access window with new user level
Click on a Yes or No in the window and the selected menu item can be
changed. So is in the figure above the menu item Logging/Logging
Settings in the Acquisition changed to Yes.

10.10.2 New User Account
If in the Manage user level access window a new user level is added, a
new user account with that new user level can be added to the user
accounts.
With in the User Accounts window a new user account can be
added to list.
Figure 10-49 New user account with the new user level
10.10.3 Changing User Account

After the different user accounts with the different user levels are setup,
the user can change the user account only in the Control Center,
Acquisition or Presentation.
Figure 10-50 User accounts can be changed
On the top right side in the application the user account can be changed.
Select the option and select one of the available user accounts. If for the
user account a password is added, then the user has to enter the
password before the selected user account becomes active.
10.11 Language
At the moment, next to the English language, the other languages that are
available in PDS2000 are Deutsch (German), Français (France), Italiana
(Italian), Nederlands (Dutch), Russian and Chinese.
If PDS2000 is running in a not English language it is possible that not all
items in a menu or in the text of the menus are in the right language. The
translation is made for a specific version of PDS2000, so if software
modification took place after that version the new items or text will be in
English.
Select from the menu bar of the Control Center the option Tools >
Options…and in the Language tab select a different language for
PDS2000.

Figure 10-51 Language tab in Options window
After a language is selected and confirmed with a message will

appear on the screen.
Figure 10-52 Message to restart PDS2000 to made the new language active
Restart PDS2000 and the selected language will be the active language
for PDS2000.
10.12 Power Management

At the start of PDS2000 a check will be done on the performance of the
PC / laptop on which PDS2000 is running. Two checks are done; on the
CPU throttling and especially for the laptops if the AC adapter is
connected.
The CPU throttling should be of to get a better performance of the system
and in PDS2000.
When the AC adapter is not connected the performance on a laptop is
less than with the AC adapter connected.
When at least one of these checks failed a message will popup when the
Control Center is started. If both are OK no message will be shown.
 The message is only a warning that the performance can be better if the
advice as mentioned in the message is followed.

Figure 10-53 Message when Control Center is started
In the figure above both checks failed. Click on to do a check the

next time the Control Center is opened, click on when no checks
have to be performed.
10.12.1 Power Management Check

The setup and the check can be started in the Control Center with the
menu option Tools > Options… and then selecting the Power
management check tab.
Figure 10-54 Power management check tab in Options window
By default the options Enable power management check on startup of the

Control Center is enabled. This means that the check is done each time
the Control Center is started.
When the Control Center is started and in the message (see Figure 10-53
above) on is clicked then the above mentioned option is
unchecked and no checks will be done when the Control Center is
started.

Click on to do a manually power management check. If everything
is OK then the following text will be displayed.
Figure 10-55 Power management check with everything is OK
When one of the checks failed the following text will be displayed.
Figure 10-56 Power management check with one check failed
In the message from a manually check also the power management

scheme is mentioned. The best performance is off course with the
scheme ‘High performance’ but when the scheme is something else, like
‘Balanced’, then it will be mentioned but no warning will be displayed.
10.13 General Settings

For other users this tab is This option is only available for one specific client. It will add an extra tab
not visible in the Options called ‘User General’ to the Explorer. In this tab data from several projects
window. can be stored and can be used in the different projects.
The items that are available in this tab are: 3D Models, Contour
Definitions, Design Profile Templates, DXF Drawings, Profile Design
Models, Runlines and Track Guidance Routes.

Figure 10-57 General Settings tab in the Options window
Select the user general folder and automatically the selected folder will
become the folder used in the User General tab in the Explorer.

11 Explorer
11.1 Introduction
PDS2000 uses different types of data files to store the relevant
information and settings. All these data files are accessible through the
Explorer.
It is also possible to use The Explorer is one of the windows that is available in the Control Center.
the context menu of the If the Explorer is not present in the Control Center, select View from the
Control Center to add or menu bar and check Explorer. To remove the window from the Control
remove the view. Center uncheck Explorer.
In the Explorer the information is divided in seven databases.
Projects Common
The settings and data files from the ‘Projects Common Files’ folder in
the PDS2000 Projects directory (see page 214).
PDS2000
General settings that can be used by all the applications and projects
in PDS2000 (see page 215).
Project
Project related settings and data files (see page 219).
Log Data
All available types of project related log data files (see page 244).
Multimedia
The multimedia files in PDS2000; the AVI, BMP, JPG and (Geo)TIFF
files (see page 246).
Report
The report files in PDS2000; CSV and PDF files (see page 248).
Sonar Targets
The sonar targets files with the GeoTIFF images of the targets (see
page 248).
Icon Images
The icon images files with the BMP and JPG images for the icons (see
page 248).
In the Explorer a directory structure is made with a separate folder for
It is possible to drag files each data type. The folders with in front of contain data files. Click on
and folders from for or double click on or the folder name to open the folder and make the
instance Windows Explorer data files accessible. With double click on one of the data files the specific
to the PDS2000 Explorer. editor for that data file will be opened. Notice that not all the data files
have their own editor.
At the moment for some data files a preview is available. Select a file and
on the right side in the Explorer, if possible, the data will be displayed. If
PDS2000 - User Manual Explorer  209

the preview pane is not visible click on in the Explorer on the top right
side to open the preview pane. Click on to close the preview pane.
The order in the folder name, the size or the date can be modified with a
click on the relevant header on top of the Explorer. With an arrow the
order direction will be indicated; arrow down is descending and an arrow
up is ascending.
The database, the file groups and the data files have their own context
menu. With the options in the context menus the items can be checked
and/or modified. The different options in the context menus will be
discussed in this chapter.
The editors which are not discussed in other chapters of the manual
and/or the editors that are only accessible through the Explorer will be
discussed in this chapter.
11.2 Context Menus
Figure 11-1 Explorer with the different context menus
In the Explorer are three different context menus available; a general, a

file group and a file context menu.
It is possible that not all the options in the context menu are available.
There are also file groups or files that have different options than the
standard options.
210  Explorer PDS2000 - User Manual

11.2.1 General Context Menu
The general context menu can be opened with a right mouse click on one
of the tabs or on the directory name at the top.
Figure 11-2 General context menu
It is easier to add files with Add Files

the Add Files option in the Add files to the selected database. Files can be selected in a standard
file group context menu dialog window. Only files which belong to the database group can be
(see below). added.
Copy Project
Only available in the Project database. Copy the project to a different
location on the PC.
Backup Project
Only available in the Project database. A backup of the project will be
made. All project files will be compressed to a ZIP file, which can be
stored on any location on the PC.
For more information about how to backup files outside the PDS2000
project folder see below.
Show Details
If checked, behind the data files the size and date will be displayed. If
not checked, no size and date is visible.
Refresh View
Refresh the view in the Explorer.
Properties
A window with the properties of the selected database will be opened.
11.2.1.1 Backup Files Outside Project

The PDS2000 Explorer in Control Center provides a method for creating
backups of entire projects (see above). However, this method only
creates a backup for files located in the project folder.
Since a new common project folder called ‘Projects Common Files’ has
been added to the PDS2000 projects folder to store for instance the
vessel outline and the equipment configuration. Additionally, this folder
contains also other files which are common for all projects and is a sub
folder of the project folder.
In the table below the file types are listed which have their location in the
‘Projects Common Files’ folder instead of the project folder. Files in this
‘Projects Common Files’ folder which are used in the backup project have
to be copied to the backup also.
Project Common Files
Type Extension
3D Studio Models 3ds
ASCII Import Configurations aic
Crane Configuration ccf

Project Common Files
Type Extension
Draught Table ddt
Export Configurations exp
Hopper Table hdt
Import Configurations imp
Numeric Pages npg
Vessel Contours vsl
Vessel Setups vsf
Wireframe Drawings dxf
Besides the project folder and the project common folder, there is the
common application folder. This folder is for Windows XP ‘C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data’ and for Windows 7
C:\ProgramData\RESON\PDS2000 and is used for storing PDS2000
application settings.
Common Application Files
File name Description
CustomActions[<module>].ini User defined action definitions
DeviceTest.ini Device test module layout settings
Editor.ini Settings for general editors (route,
waypoint, etc.)
InterfaceDef.ini I/O port definitions
Master.ini Control Center module layout settings
pds2000.ini General PDS2000 variables
pdsusergeobase.geo User coordinate system definitions
PlotApp.ini Plot module settings
R7KDistribution.ini R7K distribution module communication
settings
Commonly spoken, it is essential to backup the InterfaceDef.ini file,
 which contains the communication settings for COM and NET ports, and
the CustomActions[<module>].ini file, which contains actions defined
by the user.
When using the RESON 7k distribution module, the R7KDistribution.ini
file should be added to the backup.
Care must be taken when restoring project backups, since the backup
 could overwrite existing files in the destination ‘Projects Common Files’

and common application folders that also could be used by other projects
that are installed on the destination location.

11.2.2 File Group Context Menu
The file group context menu can be opened with a right mouse click on a
file group.
Figure 11-3 File group context menu
New File
For some files the New File A new file for the selected file group can be made and the editor of that
and/or the Add Files file group will be opened.
options are not active,
because there is no editor Add Files
available or it is not Add files to the selected file group. Files can be selected in a standard
possible to add files. dialog window. The file type is set to the file extension for the selected
file group.
Backup
A backup of the selected file group will be made. All the files in the file
group will be compressed to a ZIP file, which can be stored on any
location on the PC.
Refresh
Refresh the view in the Explorer.
11.2.3 File Context Menu

The file context menu can be opened with a right mouse click on a file in
the file group.
Figure 11-4 File context menu
Edit
For some files the Edit Will open the editor belonging to the selected file. In the editor the file
and/or the View options can be checked and/or modified.
are not active, because The editor can also be opened with a double click on the file.
there is no editor available
or it is not possible to view View
the file in Notepad. Will open the selected file in Notepad where the file can be checked
and/or modified. It is better to use the editor to modify the file.
Delete
Use the Ctrl key and the Delete the selected file(s) from the file group. It is possible to delete
Shift key to select multiple
files.
more files at the same time.
Also the ‘Delete’ key on the keyboard can be used to delete the files.
Rename
Change the name of the file.
Duplicate
Make a copy of the file. The copy will be placed in the same file group.

Backup
A backup of the selected file will be made. The file will be compressed
to a ZIP file, which can be stored on any location on the PC.
Properties
A window with the properties of the selected file will be opened.
11.3 Projects Common Database

This database shows the file groups with the projects common
information for PDS2000 (see page 54) and can be opened by selecting
the tab Projects Common at the top of the Explorer.
The different file groups of the projects common files database will be
mentioned below. It will depend on the application type which groups are
visible.
3D Studio (3DS) Models
3D models made in Studio. At the moment these models can be used
as 3D vessel contours.
ASCII Import Configurations
The import configuration files for the import options in the following
places:
 Route Editor (see page 133)
 Runlines Editor (see page 139)
 Clipping Polygon Editor (see page 225)
 Sound Velocity Profile Editor (see page 238)
 Waypoints Editor (see page 142)
 File Coordinate Conversion in the Geo Calculator (see page 199)
See also the ‘ASCII Import Wizard’ on page 136.
Crane Configurations
The crane configuration file with the configurations for the boom, stick
and tool of the (rope) excavators as they are used in the Tools page of
the vessel configuration (see page 107).
The file contains also the pipe configurations for the suction pipes of
the trailing suction hoppers as they are used in the Tools page of the
vessel configuration (see page 114).
Draught Tables
The draught tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 115). Also the bending table and the
ballast table is incorporated in the draught table.
Events
The available events in PDS2000 (see page 155).
 The events can also be edited in the Events page in the Configuration
(see page 68).
Export Configuration
The export configuration files as created in the Export Utility (see page
613).
Hopper Tables
The hopper tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 115).
Import Configuration
The import configuration files as created in the Import Utility (see page
173).

Numerics Pages
These are the numeric pages that are created in the Numerics –
Standard view of the Acquisition and Presentation (see page 335).
Vessel Contours
The contours that are drawn in the vessel contour editor (see page
95).
Vessel Setups
The part of the vessel configuration with the geometry and the
equipment setup.
Wireframe (DXF) Drawings
The DXF files that are used as wireframes for the vessels and cranes.
11.4 PDS2000 Database

This database shows the file groups with the general information for
PDS2000 and can be opened by selecting the tab PDS2000 at the top of
the Explorer. This general information is not project related and can be
used by all the projects.
Most of the modules in PDS2000 read the information from the PDS2000
 database when the module is started. If modifications are made to the

files in this database, the module have to be closed and started again
before the modifications are visible in the module.
The different file groups of the PDS2000 database will be mentioned
below. The groups which are not discussed in other chapters of the
manual will have a detailed explanation.
Application Types
The different applications which are possible with PDS2000.
The use of an application type is set in the dongle, so it is not
advisable to setup a project with a different application type then the
type(s) that is/are set in the dongle.
C-MAP Databases
All the C-map databases; the original C-Map databases from the C-
Map DVD and databases from the conversion from S-57 to C-Map.
The S-57 converted files can be used as a C-Map database in
PDS2000.
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in
the views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
 displayed. The message ‘No proper chart scale level available’ will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.
The file group context menu has other options than the standard
context menu:
Figure 11-5 File group context menu of C-MAP Databases
Convert S-57 to C-MAP – The Convert S-57 to C-MAP dialog will be

opened to convert S-57 files to a C-Map database (see page 217 how
to convert S-57 files).
C-Map Chart Manager – This is the same Chart Manager as explained
in the Installation (see page 29).
The file context menu have only two options which are not in the
standard context menu:

Figure 11-6 File context menu of the C-MAP Databases
Set as default database – With this option the selected database can
be set as default, which means that the selected database will be used
in the C-Map layers in PDS2000. It is also possible with the Chart
Manager from C-Map to set a default database.
Unregister database – The selected database will be unregistered
from the available databases in the Chart Manager.
C-MAP Filters
There are three C-Map filters available; for not showing the buoys, the
buoys and beacons and the buoys, beacons and piles in the C-Map
layer (see page 36).
Color Maps
The four different display modes (light conditions) which are available
in the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation (see page
165).
Coordinate System Databases
A new coordinate system The different databases for the coordinate systems. The
that is created through pdsgeodatabase is the database with the coordinate systems as given
New File, will be stored in by PDS2000 and the pdsusergeobase is the database with the
the pdsusergeobase. coordinate systems made by the user. see page 71 for more
information about the coordinate system database.
Devices
The devices which are available in the Equipment page (see page 96).
Display Support Files
The files with setup information for different modules in PDS2000.
Dredge Status Configurations
The configuration files with dredge settings special made for Boraciet.
In these configuration files are defined which button are available in
the Manual Input – Dredge Status view (see page 304) and how the
flow will be displayed in the Dredge – SCADA view (see page 290).
These configuration files are only available for Boraciet application
types.
Formats
The formats as defined in the project configuration (see page 59).
PDS2000 Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP files as used in the views in PDS2000.
Presentation Definitions
The views which can be opened in the Control Center, in the
Acquisition and/or in the Presentation.
System Files
The system files as used by PDS2000.
Units
The units as defined in the project configuration (see page 58).
Wave Sounds (WAV)
The WAV files for the alerts sounds as specified in the Alert Sounds
page of the Project Configuration (see page 62).

11.4.1 Convert S-57 to C-Map
The dialog to convert S-57 data to a C-Map database can be opened with
the file group context menu option Convert S-57 to C-Map or in the
Control Center with the menu option Tools > Convert S57 to C-Map.
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in the
views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
 displayed. The message ‘No proper chart scale level available’ will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.
Figure 11-7 Convert S-57 to C-Map dialog
Convert S-57 to C-Map

ENC root path
The location where the S-57 files are located. With the
right folder can be selected.
When next to the original file (.000) also updates (.001, .002, etc.)
 are available see Updates on page 219 how the conversion should
be done.
SENC database destination path
The location where the converted files will be stored as a C-Map
database, this can be any folder on the computer. With the
right folder can be selected.
Database name
Enter the name for the C-Map database in which the converted S-
57 files will be stored. Click on to start the conversion.
Before the conversion can be started, an eToken dongle from C-
 Map with the permission to convert S-57 files to C-Map should be

installed!!!!
If the S-57 files are encrypted with S-63 protection then the S-63
 support option have to be filled before the conversion can be
started.

S-63 support
S-63 is an IHO standard for encrypting and securing electronic
navigational chart (ENC) data. This option is to decrypt encrypted ENC
data, authenticate and verify it in compliance with the procedures
defined in the S-63 protection scheme.
To decrypt the data an hardware ID is needed, this can be

available in the eToken dongle or can be added manually.
Figure 11-8 Store HW ID for S-63 support
The permits to decrypt, authenticate and verify the S-63 encrypted

data have to be installed before the data can be converted.
Figure 11-9 Install permits for S-63 support
A SA certificate given by C-Map has to be installed before the S-63

encrypted data can be converted.
Figure 11-10 SA Certificate information for S-63 support
Processing
Information will be displayed for each converted file.
For each file conversion a log file is generated with the conversion
information, warnings and errors. With this button the list with log files
becomes available.

Close the dialog when the conversion is finished.
11.4.1.1 Updates
The original file has When updates for the S-57 charts are available then the updates and the
extension 000, while the original S-57 file have to be converted at the same time. The update files
updates have 001, 002, need the original file to do the conversion to the C-Map database.
etc.
The original file cannot be the old original file that is converted before;
there should be a new one next to the update files. The new original file
knows how much update files are available and need them to make the
new database.
It is possible that the update is only a new original file. Then convert only
the new original file. Keep in mind that when the conversion is started the
folder with the existing database is replaced by a new database. So for an
 update of some files all S-57 files have to be converted again to create a
new C-Map database.
11.5 Project Database

The number of visible file This database shows the file groups with all the settings and data files for
groups depends on the the selected project, and can be opened by selecting the tab Project at
dongle settings and the the top of the Explorer. These files are project related and can therefore
application type. only be used in the selected project.
Most of the modules in PDS2000 read the information in the project

database when the module is started. If modifications are made to the
files in the project database, the module have to be closed and started
again before the modifications are visible in the module.
The different file groups of the project database will be mentioned below.
The groups or the editors of that group that are not discussed in other
chapters of the manual will have a detailed explanation.
3D Models
The 3D models that can be used as a guidance in the project (see
page 143).
3D Objects
The 3D Objects file with the objects as added to the 3D Object
Manager in the Acquisition (see page 255). There will be only one 3D
Objects file per project.
Don’t rename the file otherwise the objects aren’t visible anymore in
the 3D view.
Alarms
The alarm files as created in the vessel configuration. These files can
only be edited in the tab Alarms of the vessel configuration (see page
129).
BSB Charts (KAP)
The raster (navigational) charts in BSB file format. The extension for
the BSB charts is KAP.

Figure 11-11 File context menu of the BSB Charts (KAP)
Export to GeoTIFF is an extra option in the file context menu of the

BSB Charts. The BSB charts cannot be used in PDS2000. The file has
to be exported to a GeoTIFF file before PDS2000 can use the
information (see page 246).
Clipping Polygons
The clipping polygons that can be used on several places in the
project (see page 224).
Figure 11-12 File group context menu of the Clipping Polygons

Import from DXF files is an extra option in the file group context menu
of the clipping polygon. A DXF file can be imported with the restriction
that the data in the DXF file contain only one polygon.
Figure 11-13 File context menu of the Clipping Polygons

Export to DXF file is an extra option in the file context menu of the
clipping polygon. A clipping polygon file can be exported to a DXF file
and will be stored in the project.
It is possible to import multiple DXF files and also to export multiple
clipping polygons in one time. Each DXF file that is imported becomes
a clipping polygon file and each exported clipping polygon file
becomes a DXF file.
Color Tables
The color tables that can be used for the grid models, the 3D views, in
the plotting, etc (see page 226).
Configurations
The different configurations that are created in this project. The active
configuration can also be opened with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with in the toolbar of the Control Center.

Contour Definitions
The contour definitions that can be used in the plotting (see page 231).
CUBE Models
The CUBE models as generated in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view (see page 439).
Design Profile Templates
These templates can be used for creating 3D models in the project
(see page 233).
Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Drawings
All different DXF drawings used in the project. The DXF drawing can
be used as background layer or as import file in several editors.
 The DXF wireframes that are used in the project are available in the
Projects Common tab (see page 214).
Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Export Files
The DXF export setting files which are created after the DXF Export
Wizard in the plot module is finished (see page 591).
 With the file context menu option Edit, the DXF Export Wizard will be
opened.
Dredge Instructions
The dredge instructions are at the moment only available for one
specific client (see page 151).
ESRI Shapes (SHP)
ESRI shapes which can be added in the Plan View – Navigation.
Excluded Areas
The excluded areas used for creating a CUBE model (see page 441).
See page 234 to create or modify an excluded area.
This item is only available in the multibeam application type with a
specific dongle.
Generic ASCII (ASC) Files
All the ASCII files that are generated in the project.
Grid Model Filters
The filters that are created in the grid model editor for the option ‘make
empty’. See for the grid model filter dialog on page 527.
Grid Model Metadata
The grid model metadata files contain the information about the related
grid model; how it is created, which data is used, etc.
Grid Models
The grid models that are created or generated in the project (see page
507).
Log Data File Sets
These files are the file sets that are created with the File Set Editor
(see page 397) or with the Import Utility (see page 173).
Module Configurations
The only configuration at the moment is made for a specific client and
can be used for data exchange between vessels and onshore.
Multibeam Calibrations
The configurations of the multibeam calibrations.
OpenGIS KML Encoding Standard (KML) files
The KML files are point cloud files with the Z values of a grid model.
These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid Model
Editor (see page 522). The KML files can be opened in an OpenGIS
system, i.e Google Earth.

The KML files contain the X and Y which are converted to WGS’84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS’84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The
Z value is the value of the selected data type of the grid model.
OpenGIS Zipped KML Encoding Standard (KMZ) files
The KMZ files contain a compressed GeoTIFF file representing a grid
model. These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid
Model Editor (see page 522). The KMZ files can be opened in an
OpenGIS system, i.e Google Earth.
PDS1000 Electronic Charts
The charts that are created with the old PDS1000 software can be
used as a layer in several views or in the plotting.
Placement Points
The created vessel placement points which can be used as a guidance
in the project (see page 149).
Profile Design Models
The profile design models that can be used to create 3D models in the
project (see page 144). The profile design models can also be used for
the volume computations (see page 604). See for more information
page 234.
Project Files
The project configuration files of the project. The project configuration
can also be opened with Edit > Project Configuration from the menu
bar or with in the toolbar of the Control Center. See for more
information on page 57.
Restricted Areas
The created restricted areas that can be used as a guidance in the
Runlines
The created runlines that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 138).
Figure 11-14 File group context menu of the Runlines

Import from DXF is an extra option in the file group context menu of
the runlines. From the DXF file only the lines that contain two points
(straight lines) can be converted to runlines. The lines have to be of
the linetype ‘Line’ One runlines file will be generated with all the lines
from the DXF file.
Figure 11-15 File context menu of the Runlines


Export Runlines is an extra option in the file context menu of the
runlines. The runlines will be exported to an ASCII file containing the
runline name and the start and end coordinates of the runline.
Screen Layouts
The screen layout files as they are used in the Acquisition, the
Presentation and Editing.
Sound Velocity Profiles
The sound velocity profiles that are created and can be used in a
multibeam or single beam survey project (see page 237).
Stations
The station files with a position for a range – range system.
Text (TXT) Files
The TXT files as generated in PDS2000.
Tide Stations
The tide stations that are setup in the project (see page 239).
Tide Values
The monthly files belonging to the tide stations that are setup in ‘Tide
Station’.
TIN Models
The TIN models that are created in the project (see page 539).
Track Guidance Routes
The created routes that can be used as a guidance in the project (see
page 132).
Figure 11-16 File group context menu of the Track Guidance Routes

Import from DXF is an extra option in the file group context menu of
the track guidance routes. From the DXF file only the polylines can be
converted to track guidance routes. For each polyline a separate track
guidance route will be generated.
User Interface Profiles
The UI Profiles which are used for the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation(s). These profiles contains the settings of the
toolbars used in the three windows. When the user changes one of the
toolbars it will be saved and the next time the new toolbar layout will
come up. Delete in the Explorer the UIP file of a window, if the user
wants to go back to the original (default) toolbar for that window.
User Maps
The user maps are files with user objects that can be created in the
plan views. The different user objects are lines, rectangles, circles,
polygons, text and symbols (see pagexxx).
User Presentation Defaults
There is only one file available, the file ‘EditorView’ and it contains all
the defaults for the editors. When in the context menu of a view the
option Save as Default is selected, the file ‘EditorView’ will be created
or updated.

Vessels
The vessel configurations which are setup in the project. See for more
information the chapter ‘Vessel Configuration’ on page 91.
Volume Computations
The end area volume computations that are computed during the
Waypoints
The created waypoints that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 141).
Figure 11-17 File context menu of the Waypoints

Export Waypoints to Geo is an extra option in the file context menu of
the waypoints. The waypoints will be exported to an ASCII file
containing the waypoints with their geographical coordinates.
Work Areas
The created work areas that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 147).
11.5.1 Clipping Polygons

A clipping polygon defines the borders of an area and can be used for
various purposes in PDS2000.
 Make a condition check on the logging (see page 126).
 Import a plane in the 3D model (see page 144).
 Create a work area (see page 147).
 Create a restricted area (see page 148).
 Create an excluded area (see page 234).
 Use as a boundary in the create model editor (see page 499).
 Use as a boundary in the grid model editor (see page 508).
The Clipping Polygon editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing clipping polygon or by selecting the option New File in the context
menu of the file group ‘Clipping Polygons’ in the Explorer.

11.5.1.1 Clipping Polygon Editor
Figure 11-18 Clipping Polygon editor
A clipping polygon is always closed. The clipping polygon editor

automatically close the polygon, the user do not have to add the first point
again to close the polygon. The (red) dot in the editor is the selected point
from the table at the top.
Click on to add a new point to the table. The coordinates can be
added in the upper right corner of the editor. Click on to select the
coordinate type, grid or geographical coordinates. Click on to
insert a point above the selected point in the table and click on to
delete the selected point in the table.
In the menu bar some extra functions are available:
Options > Grid Properties
Select the grid to be shown in the view of the editor: Grid Crosses,
Solid Line Grid, Dotted Line Grid or a Scale Bar. The grid can be with
or without a grid annotation.
Options > Import from ASCII…
An ASCII import wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings. This import wizard is the same type of import wizard
as discussed on page 136. The ASCII file should contain the X and Y
coordinates of the clipping polygon.
Options > Import from DXF…
Select a DXF file with a polygon and the polygon will be imported in
the Clipping Polygon editor.

Options > Export to DXF
The clipping polygon as displayed in the editor will be exported to a
DXF file. The DXF file will be stored in the project.
11.5.2 Color Tables

Color tables are used to show measured values in different colors in the
various models and views.
The color table generator can be opened by double clicking on an existing
color table, by selecting the option New File in the context menu of the file
group ‘Color Tables’ in the Explorer and by double clicking on the color
table on the right side in the views.
The color table of the bottom classification, [bottom-type], cannot be
opened in the color table generator. This type cannot be generated, only
the color and the label can be modified (see page 230).
The dredge differential color table has a special color table generator to
set the colors for the under- and overdredge limits (see page 231).
11.5.2.1 Color Table Generator
Figure 11-19 Color Table generator with a color table added (between 0 and -5)
to the existing color table
Add the values for the maximum and minimum range, select the number
of colors or the step size and click on to create a color table. With
a color table can be added to the existing color table.
If the option is selected the generator will use the whole color spectrum
to generates the colors. It will start with the selected color for the
maximum value and will stop with the color of the minimum value. With
the option only the two selected colors will be used to generate the
color table. The color starts with the selected color for the maximum value
and will stop with the color of the minimum value and for the intermediate
values the colors will run into one another.

The items in the color table generator are:
Name
This is the name of the color table.
When the Color Table generator is opened in a view or editor this
option becomes active and the user can select a different color table.
Generate range
Maximum
Select a color for the maximum value and add a maximum value for
the color table. All the values above the maximum value get the
same color as the maximum value.
Minimum
Select a color for the minimum value and add a minimum value for
the color table. The minimum value color will be used for all the
values below the minimum value.
Number of colors
Add a number and the Color Table generator will automatically
calculates the step size.
Step size
Add a step size to get a fixed interval and the Color Table
generator will automatically calculates the number of colors.
Mode
With this option the whole spectrum will be used to go from the
color of the maximum value to the color of the minimum value.
Figure 11-20 Color table with the option from 0 to -2

With this option only the colors of the maximum and minimum
value and the colors that run into one another will be used.
Figure 11-21 Color table with the option from 0 to -2
A color table will be generated using a part ( )or the whole ( )

spectrum started with the maximum value and stops with the
minimum value. The number of colors will depend on the number of
colors or the step size that is selected.
Set the maximum, minimum, number of colors or step size and a

color table will be added to the existing color table using the
selected settings. The values from the existing color table that
overlaps with the added color table will be overwritten.
Range colors
The maximum color becomes white and the minimum color

becomes black. The colors in between are divided in grey scales.
The maximum color becomes purple and the minimum color

becomes red. The colors in between are divided in the colors of the
spectrum.
The maximum color becomes yellow and the minimum color

becomes brown. Below the minimum the color is black. The will be
used to color the color table for the sidescan or snippets data.
The maximum and minimum colors will be reversed.
Select one of the colors on the left side and click on . A Color
Table Entry dialog will be opened where the color and the minimum
value for the selected color can be changed. Click on to
confirm the change and a star will be placed in the edited color as an
indicator (see below).

Figure 11-22 Color Table Entry
When the color table is

generated again the edited Add a new color and a minimum value to the color table. The same
values with a star will be Color Table Entry dialog as above will be opened. The added color
kept in the color table. gets a star, the same as above.
Figure 11-23 Value -1.10 is added to the color table
Will delete the selected color from the table.
Will delete the whole color table.

,
The colors in the table can be moved up and down.
Will show only the color table, there will be no buttons to generate a
color table.
Will show the Color Table generator again. This button appears when
is used to show only the color table.

11.5.2.2 Color Table for Bottom Classification
Figure 11-24 Color table for bottom classification
In this color table only the colors and the text of the labels can be
modified. Click on if it is needed to reset the colors and text to the
default settings.
Double click on one of the colors and the Color Table Entry dialog will be
opened.
Figure 11-25 Color Table Entry for the bottom classification color table
For the values between the minimum and maximum value as displayed
on top of the dialog a different color can be selected and another text can
be entered.
 It is not possible to modify the range and the steps for this type of color
table.

11.5.2.3 Dredge Differential Color Table
Figure 11-26 Dredge differential color table generator
The dredge differential color table generator has three section; above
underdredge limit, below overdredge limit and between the two limits. For
each section the number of colors and maximum/minimum color can be
set. The edges between the section are defined by the underdredge limit
and overdredge limit.
In the Acquisition the underdredge limit and overdredge limit will be
automatically synchronized with the settings of the design model. So
when the limits for the design model are specified as 1 and -1 then the
limits in the color table will be changed from 0.5 to 1 and from -0.5 to -1.
The color scheme stays the same.
See the 3D View – Online Dredge on page 274 for an example of the
dredge differential color table.
11.5.3 Contour Definitions

The contour definitions are used to plot contours in the plotting.
The Contour definition generator can be opened by double clicking on an
existing contour definition or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Contour Definitions’ in the Explorer.

11.5.3.1 Contour Definition Generator
Figure 11-27 Contour definition generator
If a new contour definition has to be generated, the left side will be empty.
Start then with or generate a contour definition with the option
or .
A contour line can be added to the list on the left side. A Contour
Properties window will be opened, where the settings for the line can
be set.
Figure 11-28 Contour Properties
Add a value for the level and select a color for the contour line.
For the line style three options are available; a continuous, a dashed
or dotted line.
Give a line width for the contour line.
 If a label with the depth value has to be plotted, check the option
Show labels.
Will delete the selected contour line.
Will edit the selected contour line. The Contour Properties window will
be opened (see above).
A contour definition will be generated based on a minimum level, a

maximum level and an interval. A Generate Contours window will be
opened.

Figure 11-29 Generate Contours
A color table will be used to generate the contours. Each value from
the color table becomes a contour line with the color from the color
table.
11.5.4 Design Profile Templates

A design profile template is a 2D shape of a profile. In the profile design
model editor a template can be combined with a route or runlines to
generate a profile design model (see page 234).
The Design Profile Template Editor can be opened by double clicking on
an existing design profile template or by selecting the option New File in
the context menu of the file group ‘Design Profile Templates’ in the
Explorer.
11.5.4.1 Design Profile Template Editor
Figure 11-30 Design Profile Template editor
Create a new template. Give a name for the new template and add the
offsets and heights.
Rename the selected template.

Delete the selected template.
If the design profile template is used in combination with a runline, the
zero offset is in the center of the runline. The start of the runline has a
negative offset and the end a positive offset.
If the design profile template is used in combination with a route, the zero
offset is on the route. The profiles are perpendicular to the route with on
the left side of the route a negative offset and on the right side a positive
offset.
Click on to delete the selected offset and the height.
11.5.5 Excluded Areas

An excluded area is an area that will be used to excluded areas during
the creation of a CUBE model.
An excluded area is a clipping polygon or a route with a tolerance. One
excluded area file can contain several excluded areas.
The Excluded Areas editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing excluded area file or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Excluded Areas’ in the Explorer.
11.5.5.1 Excluded Areas Editor
Figure 11-31 Exclude Areas editor with one excluded area
Click on to add a new exclude area to the list. Check the option
Polygon or Route and select the right clipping polygon or route with a
tolerance. The clipping polygon or route should exist in the project.
11.5.6 Profile Design Models

A profile design model is a combination of a design profile template with a
route or runlines. The design profile template can be generated in the
Design Profile Template Editor (see page 233).
The Profile Design Model Editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing profile design model or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Profile Design Models’ in the Explorer.
By selecting the option New File a wizard with two pages will be opened.
In the first page the new file name has to be added. In the second page

the design profile template can be linked to runlines or to KP positions on
a route. Both the options have their own Profile Design Model Editor.
11.5.6.1 Profile Design Model Editor with Runlines
Figure 11-32 Profile Design Model Editor with runlines
The editor is empty when a new model has to be created.
A template with the runlines can be added to the model. An Add to

Design Model window will be opened where the template and the
runlines can be selected.
Figure 11-33 Add a template to a design model
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.

The selected template can be edited in the Design Profile Template
Editor (see page 233).
The Design Profile Template Editor will be opened to create a new

design profile template (see page 233).
The plan view and the template view have their own context menu. In
both context menus the standard zoom functions Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Zoom Window and Zoom Extents are available.
11.5.6.2 Profile Design Model Editor with a Route
Figure 11-34 Profile Design Model Editor with a route
The editor is empty when a new model has to be created.
Before a design profile template can be added the right track guidance
route has to be selected. After that a template can be added with
. An Add to Design Model window will be opened where the
template can be selected.

Figure 11-35 Select a template for the profile design model
The template can be added to three different locations on the route;

Start KP, End KP or Specified KP.
If only one template is used for the whole route, it does not matter
where the template is located. The profile design model will be
generated over the whole route using the selected template.
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.
The selected template can be edited in the Design Profile Template

Editor (see page 233).
The Design Profile Template Editor will be opened to create a new

design profile template (see page 233233).
It is possible to have different design profile templates over the route.
Locate each template on a different KP position and the model will be
generated over the route using the different templates.
Check the options Link template to route Z level when the templates have
to move up and down with the Z value of the route. This is only possible
when the route is created as a pipe / cable route (see page 132).
Check the options Show template at specified KP and give a KP value to
show in the template view the template belonging to that specified KP
value. In the plan view the template on that KP position will become red.
11.5.7 Sound Velocity Profiles

Before a multibeam echo sounder survey can be carried out, a sound
velocity profile is required to correct for the sound velocity in the water. It
is also possible to have a sound velocity profile for a single beam echo
sounder survey.
The Sound Velocity Profile Editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing sound velocity profile or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ in the Explorer.

11.5.7.1 Sound Velocity Profile Editor
Figure 11-36 Sound Velocity Profile Editor
When a new sound velocity profile is created the editor will be empty. The
table of the profile can be filled manually or an ASCII file with sound
velocity data can be imported with the option . Before this button is
opened to select the type of import the user has to select which part of the
data has to be imported; the upcast, the downcast or both.
The units for the four columns are not depending on the settings in the
project configuration (see page 58). The depth is always in meters, the
velocity is in m/s, the temperature is in °C and the salinity is in parts per
ton (ppt).
To add a SVP value to the table, fill in a depth value on the empty place
at the bottom of the depth column. When the next column is selected the
depth values will be automatically sorted.
A depth value can be deleted by selecting one of the values in a row and
click on . The whole row will be removed from the table. With

Язык

Добро пожаловать в Scribd!

PDS2000 User Manual.pdf

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Дата загрузки

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Описание:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PDS2000 User Manual.pdf

Загружено:

Описание:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Похожие издания

User Manual

Tel.: +31 (0)10 245 15 00

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  i

ii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  iii

iv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

10 Control Center 163

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  v

vi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  vii

viii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  ix

x  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xi

xii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

17 Create Model 499

18 Grid Model 507

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xiii

xiv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

21 End Area Volumes 603

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xv

xvi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xvii

xviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xix

xx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxi

xxii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxiii

xxiv  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxv

xxvi  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxvii

xxviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxix

xxx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxxi

PDS2000 - User Manual Introduction  1

2.2.1 Anchor Handling

2.2.2 Bar Sweep

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  3

2.2.3.1 Appendix Boeilog

2.2.4.1 Addendum Boraciet

2.2.5 Bottom Classification

4  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.7 Cable Lay

2.2.8 Cutter Dredge

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  5

2.2.11 Frequently Asked Questions

2.2.13 Interface Setup

2.2.15 Multibeam Calibration

6  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.16 PDS2000 LiteView

2.2.17 PDS2000 User Manual

2.2.18 Pipe Detection

2.2.19 Pipe Position Monitor

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  7

2.2.21 Rope Excavator